Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statements
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 iii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-14
1-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-46
1-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDHIGH .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-68
1-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INSERTMOD .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-92
1-92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF-O ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-118
1-118
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MMG ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-149
1-149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSLOW ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-170
1-170
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RDI ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-187
1-187
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRANSFERLOGFT ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-214
1-214
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTR ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-242
1-242
2 Trouble-clearing procedures
Safety statements
AISL
ALLCHANMISS
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
AMPDISABLED
APRLINE
APRNODE
APROSC
APRSWITCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO
APRUNAVAIL
APRUNAVAILOSC
APSB
APSCM
APSMM
ASONTOPO
AUTHFAIL
AUTORESET
AUTOSWTIMREF
B1SD
BASELINE
BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR
BDIODU
CARDBOOT
CARDINIT
CONFIGFAIL
CONTCOM
CONTEQPT
CONTR
CONTR-OUT
CRDINIT
DATAERR
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xv
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP
DBFL
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure) .......................................................................... 2-80
2-80
DBFT
DBINVALID
DBMEMTRF
DBRSTR-IP
DBUNSYNC
DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are not synchronized) ....................................... 2-87
2-87
DEG
DISCOVERMOD
DORMANTUSER
EBER
ETHCSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
EQPTBOOT
EQPTDGR
EQPTDGROCH
EQPTDGR-OUT
EQPTDGROCH-OUT
EQPTPORT
ENV
ESCLATCHFAIL
ESCLATCHFAIL (Channel Attempted Escape from Latchup Routine Failed) ............................................ 2-114
2-114
ETR-MISMATCHMOD
ETR-MISMATCHMOD (Extended Temp Range Violation: non-ETR Pluggable Module) .................... 2-118
2-118
EXCESSLOAD
EXCESSLOSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV
FANSPEEDHIGH
FANSPEEDLOW
FANSPEEDMAN
FECECSD
FECUBCSD
FELANLFI
FELANLOS
FELANLSS
FELANRFI
FELOS
FEPORTMISMATCH
FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAFAIL
FPGAINIT
FPGATIMEOUT
FRCDSWTIMREF
FRCDWKSWBK
FRCDWKSWPR
FRNGSYNC
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to become obsolete with the software
release upgrade) ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-142
2-142
FWUPGRADEPENDING
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is not the default version for this
software release) .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-145
2-145
HIBER
HIGAIN
HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High) ....................................................................... 2-148
2-148
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xix
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HLDOVRSYNC
HWNOTSUPPORTED
INSERTMOD
INTTEMPHIGH
INTTEMPLOW
INTTEMPOPT
INTRUSION
INVALIDEGRESS
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVENTORYERROR
LANLFI
LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
LANRFI
LASEREOL
LCK
LCKEGR
LFD
LFIEGR
LINKDOWN
LINKUP
LOAM
LOC
LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-179
2-179
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxi
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF
LOFEGR
LOFLOM
LOFLOM (Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU)) ....................................................... 2-190
2-190
LOGAIN
LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low) ........................................................ 2-193
2-193
LOM
LOS
LOSDCM
LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSOCM
LOS-O
LOS-O-OUT
LOS-OUT
LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel Absent) .......................................................... 2-220
2-220
LOS-P
LOT-OUT
LPBKLINE
LPBKTERM
LSPOW_ALM_W
LSTEMP_ALM_W
LSSEGR
LTC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxiii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance) / MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical removal performed on a timing
reference) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-234
2-234
MANRESET
MANSWTIMREF
MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference) ..... 2-238
2-238
MANSWTOINT
MANWKSWBK
MANWKSWPR
MISMATCH
MISMATCHFIBER
MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIXEDPFUSED
MMG
MOD
MODOUTOOR
MSIM
MTCESURV
MTCESURVDGR
NET
NOTALLOWED
NTPOOSYNC
NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is reachable) .............................. 2-269
2-269
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
OCHFDI
OCHPDI
OCHKEYDUP
OCHKEYOVERLAP
OCHTRAILDUP
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
OCHUNKNOWN
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
OCI
OCIEGR
OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSHIGH
OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range Loss Too High between DCM Ports of LD) ................. 2-297
2-297
OPRLOSSLOW
OPRPWRHIGH
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) ........................................................... 2-301
2-301
OPRPWRLOW
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) ............................................................. 2-303
2-303
OPROOR
OPR-OUT
OPRTX
OPRUNACHIEVE
OPTINTBASE
OPTINTDET
OPTINTSUSP
OSCSSF
PCSGENERATOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
PLMEGR
PRCDRERR
PWR
PWR.............................................................................................................................................................................................
(Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low) 2-330 2-330
PWRADJCOMMS
PWRADJFAIL
.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-335
2-335
PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - Cross Connect Provisioned) .............................. 2-338
2-338
PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On External - Raman Amplifier Span) .................... 2-347
2-347
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Card Required for Adjust Not Present) ....................................................................................... 2-348
2-348
PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) .................................................... 2-364
2-364
PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4) ........................................... 2-366
2-366
PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) .................................................... 2-369
2-369
PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for adjustment) .................................................... 2-370
2-370
PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too Low) ................................... 2-380
2-380
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxix
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated) .................................................................................... 2-383
2-383
PWRADJFAILADD
PWRADJFAILADD (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress); PWRADJFAILADD (In Progress) ....... 2-393
2-393
PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR Optimization) .................................................. 2-398
2-398
PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path Optimization) .............................................. 2-400
2-400
PWRADJFAILDRP
PWRADJFAILDRP (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress); PWRADJFAILDRP (In Progress) ......... 2-405
2-405
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path Optimization) ........................................................ 2-409
2-409
PWRADJREQ
PWRMARGIN
PWRMAXGAIN
PWRSUSP
PWRTILTSUSP
PWRTILTPARAMS
RAMANGAINFAIL
RAMANSUP
RCVROPTPROG
RDI
REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxi
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
REPLUNITMISSMOD
RFIEGR
RFIL
SDBER
SDEG-O
SDEGR
SFMISMATCH
SLTMSIG
SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the required accuracy limits (not Protected
or Protection not Available)) .................................................................................................................................... 2-455
2-455
SSF
SSFODU
SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWEQPT
SWFTDWN
SWMTXMOD
SWUPGCOMMIT
SWUPGFAIL
SYNCOOS
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not Available)) / SYNCOOS
(Timing reference failed--system going into holdover) ................................................................................. 2-483
2-483
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not Available)) .................................... 2-484
2-484
SYNREFFAIL
SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not Available)) ............................. 2-486
2-486
SYNREFUNEQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxiii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT
TIM
TIMEGR
TIMODU
TRANSFERLOG
TRMT
TRMTMOD
TSMISMATCH
UNG/UNP
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
URU
USALS
USLOS
USOCHCOLLISION
VCGLOA
VCGSSF
VOLTAGEHIGH
VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxv
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI
VTSOCI
WKSWBK
WKSWPR
WTR
3 Supporting procedures
Card-Specific Troubleshooting
Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF) .......................................................................... 3-7
3-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM ........................................................................................... 3-18
3-18
DCN Diagnostics
Firmware
LED Status
Performing loopbacks
Rebooting Components
Reseating a Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxvii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing System Components
Software Upgrades
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xxxix
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xli
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Unscrew Filter Retainer ........................................................................................................................................ 3-81
3-81
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document provides information about managing the detection, isolation, and
correction of abnormal operation.
Intended audience
This document is intended for the following users of the 1830 PSS documentation library:
network planners
administrators
operators
maintenance personnel
1830 PSS products are meant to be installed, operated, and maintained by personnel who
have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to safely perform the tasks
assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures contained in the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 product documentation are intended for use by trained and
qualified personnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xliii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Conventions used
The following typographical conventions are used throughout this document:
Bold is used to identify CIT menu selections and button selections.
Italic is used to identify NE messages
Computer voice is used to identify system message text displayed by the CIT
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50 Engineering and
Planning Tool (EPT) User Guide is part of a set of documents that support the 1830 PSS
product family. The following items are available:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xliv 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support at or the telephone number listed under the Technical
Assistance Center menu at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents and courses, use the following websites, or the e-mail,
phone, and fax contacts linked from "Contact Us" on the following sites:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xlv
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation:
http://www.lucentdocs.com/
Training:
http://training.lucent.com/
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union (EU), shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life in compliance with applicable EU and local legislation. They shall not be
disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained
in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may
be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the EU, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the
product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlvi 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent
equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 xlvii
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlviii 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
1 1 larm and condition
A
details
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of all of the alarm conditions generated by
the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4. Basic summary information is in the alarm.
Additional details can be obtained by querying the relevant entities.
The following information is provided for each condition type:
a description of the condition that includes the possible root cause.
the alarm severity.
whether or not the condition is service-affecting.
the cards or systems to which the condition applies.
For a description and overview of alarm management, alarm severity, and alarm
reporting, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 3.6.50 User
Provisioning Guide.
For detailed information on TL1 AIDs for each pack, and rules for shelf and slot
assignments in the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 TL1 Command and
Messages Guide.
Contents
AISL 1-9
AIS - ODU 1-10
AISOTU 1-10
ALLCHANMISS 1-11
ALLCHANMISSOUT 1-11
AMPDISABLED 1-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-1
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRLINE 1-13
APRNODE 1-13
APROSC 1-14
APRSWITCH 1-14
APRTOPO 1-15
APRUNAVAIL 1-15
APRUNAVAILOSC 1-16
APSB 1-16
APSCM 1-17
APSMM 1-19
ASOTOPO 1-20
AUTHFAIL 1-21
AUTORESET 1-22
AUTOSWTIMREF 1-24
B1SD 1-24
BASELINE 1-25
BDI 1-26
BDIEGR 1-28
BDIODU 1-28
CARDBOOT 1-30
CARDINIT 1-32
CONFIGFAIL 1-34
CONTCOM 1-36
CONTEQPT 1-38
CONTR 1-38
CONTR-OUT 1-39
CRDINIT 1-39
DATAERR 1-42
DATAFLT 1-43
DBBKUP-IP 1-46
DBFL 1-46
DBFT 1-46
DBINVALID 1-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBMEMTRF 1-47
DBRSTR-IP 1-47
DBUNSYNC 1-48
DEG 1-48
DEGOTU 1-50
DISCOVERMOD 1-51
DORMANTUSER 1-52
EBER 1-53
EBER-O 1-53
ETHCSF 1-54
ENV [1-8] 1-54
EQPT 1-55
EQPTBOOT 1-57
EQPTDGR 1-59
EQPTDGROCH 1-60
EQPTDGROCH-OUT 1-61
EQPTDGR-OUT 1-62
EQPTPORT 1-63
ESCLATCHFAIL 1-64
ETR-MISMATCHMOD 1-64
EXCESSLOAD 1-65
EXCESSLOSS 1-66
FACTERM-DEV 1-66
FANSPEEDHIGH 1-68
FANSPEEDLOW 1-68
FANSPEEDMAN 1-69
FDI 1-69
FECECSD 1-70
FECUBCSD 1-70
FELANLFI 1-71
FELANLOS 1-71
FELANLSS 1-72
FELANRFI 1-73
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-3
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS 1-74
FEPORTMISMATCH 1-74
FEPRLF 1-75
FPGAFAIL 1-76
FPGAINIT 1-77
FPGATIMEOUT 1-79
FRCDSWTIMREF 1-81
FRCDWKSWBK 1-82
FRCDWKSWPR 1-83
FRNGSYNC 1-84
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE 1-85
FWUPGRADEPENDING 1-87
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT 1-88
HIBER 1-90
HIGAIN 1-91
HLDOVRSYNC 1-91
HWNOTSUPPORTED 1-92
INSERTMOD 1-92
INTTEMPHIGH 1-94
INTTEMPLOW 1-96
INTTEMPOPT 1-98
INTRUSION 1-98
INTRUSIONEVT 1-99
INVALIDEGRESS 1-99
INVALIDTHRESHOLD 1-100
INVENTORYERROR 1-100
LANLFI 1-103
LANLOS 1-104
LANLSS 1-105
LANRFI 1-106
LASEREOL 1-107
LCK 1-107
LCKEGR 1-109
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD 1-109
LFIEGR 1-110
LINKDOWN 1-111
LINKUP 1-111
LOAM 1-112
LOC 1-112
LOCKOUTOFPR 1-113
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF 1-114
LOF 1-114
LOFEGR 1-116
LOFLOM 1-117
LOF-O 1-118
LOGAIN 1-119
LOM 1-119
LOS 1-121
LOSDCM 1-124
LOSLDSig 1-125
LOSOCM 1-125
LOS-O 1-126
LOS-OUT 1-126
LOS-P 1-128
LOT-OUT 1-130
LPBKLine 1-130
LPBKTERM 1-132
LSPOW_ALM_W 1-133
LSTEMP_ALM_W 1-133
LSSEGR 1-134
EBER 1-134
MAN 1-135
MANRESET 1-139
MANSWTIMREF 1-141
MANSWTOINT 1-141
MANWKSWBK 1-141
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-5
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR 1-143
MISMATCH 1-144
MISMATCHFIBER 1-147
MISMATCHMOD 1-147
MIXEDPFUSED 1-149
MMG 1-149
MOD 1-149
MODOUTOOR 1-150
MSIM 1-151
MTCESURV 1-151
MTCESURVDGR 1-152
NET 1-153
NOTALLOWED 1-154
NTPOOSYNC 1-154
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH 1-154
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH 1-155
OCHCOLLISION 1-156
OCHCOLLISION-OUT 1-157
OCHKEYDUP 1-157
OCHKEYOVERLAP 1-158
OCHFDI 1-159
OCHPDI 1-160
OCHTRAILDUP 1-161
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN 1-162
OCHUNKNOWN 1-163
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT 1-164
OCI 1-165
OCIEGR 1-167
OPR 1-167
OPRPWRHIGH 1-168
OPRPWRLOW 1-169
OPRLOSSHIGH 1-169
OPRLOSSLOW 1-170
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPROOR 1-171
OPR-OUT 1-171
OPRTX 1-172
OPRUNACHIEVE 1-173
OPTINTBASE 1-174
OPTINTDET 1-174
OPTINTSUSP 1-175
OSCSSF 1-176
PCSGENERATOR 1-176
PLM 1-177
PLMEGR 1-178
PRCDRERR-TOPO 1-178
PWR 1-179
PWRADJCOMMS 1-180
PWRADJFAIL 1-180
PWRADJFAILADD 1-181
PWRADJFAILDRP 1-182
PWRADJREQ 1-182
PWRMARGIN 1-183
PWRMAXGAIN 1-183
PWRSUSP 1-184
PWRTILTSUSP 1-185
PWRTILTSUSP 1-185
RAMANGAINFAIL 1-186
RAMANSUSP (Raman Suppress - Line) 1-186
RCVROPTPROG 1-187
RDI 1-187
REMOVEMOD 1-188
REPLUNITMISS 1-189
REPLUNITMISSMOD 1-194
RFIEGR 1-195
RFIL 1-195
SDBER 1-196
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-7
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTS-TX 1-226
URU-OTU 1-227
URU-OTU 1-229
USALS (rr) 1-229
USLOS 1-231
USOCHCOLLISION 1-232
VCGLOA 1-233
VCGSSF 1-233
VOLTAGEHIGH 1-233
VOLTAGELOW 1-236
VTSFDI 1-238
VTSOCI 1-238
WKSWBK 1-239
WKSWPR 1-240
WTR 1-242
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - ODU
AISOTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS
ALLCHANMISSOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-11
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details ALLCHANMISSOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMPDISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APRLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRLINE
APRNODE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-13
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APROSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC
APRSWITCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APRTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO
APRUNAVAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-15
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APRUNAVAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAILOSC
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-17
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-19
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details ASOTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASOTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details ASOTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTHFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-21
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-23
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details AUTOSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTOSWTIMREF
B1SD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details BASELINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BASELINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-25
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details BASELINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-27
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details BDIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR
BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-29
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CARDBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CARDBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-31
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-33
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-35
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-37
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONTEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTEQPT
CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-38 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CONTR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT
CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-39
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-41
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-43
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-45
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DBBKUP-IP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP
DBFL
DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID
DBMEMTRF
DBRSTR-IP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-47
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DBUNSYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBUNSYNC
DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-49
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DEGOTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEGOTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-51
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details DISCOVERMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER
EBER-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETHCSF
ENV [1-8]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
Card Failure - Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-55
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-57
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-58 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR
Port Degrade: Communications with the Wavelength Tracker on this card are unreliable
and any Wavelength Tracker information sent or generated may be incorrect.
Card Degrade: A fault on the card has caused the system to declare a hardware failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-59
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGROCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-61
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGROCH-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EQPTDGR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT
Port Failure - Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-63
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details ESCLATCHFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESCLATCHFAIL
ETR-MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EXCESSLOAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-65
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EXCESSLOSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOSS
FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDHIGH
FANSPEEDLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FANSPEEDMAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDMAN
FDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-69
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FECECSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECECSD
FECUBCSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FELANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLFI
FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-71
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-72 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-73
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS
FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-75
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAFAIL
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-76 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGAFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAINIT
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-77
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGAINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGAINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-79
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-81
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-82 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-83
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRNGSYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-85
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-86 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-87
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-88 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIBER
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-90 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details HIGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIGAIN
HLDOVRSYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-91
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details HWNOTSUPPORTED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HWNOTSUPPORTED
INSERTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-92 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INSERTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-94 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-95
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-96 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-97
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INTTEMPOPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPOPT
INTRUSION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-98 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INTRUSIONEVT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSIONEVT
INVALIDEGRESS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-99
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INVALIDTHRESHOLD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-100 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-102 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-103
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-104 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-105
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-106 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LASEREOL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LASEREOL
LCK
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-107
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-108 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LCKEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCKEGR
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU2
Description Egress Locked - ODU
Corrective Action Proceed to LCKEGR (p. 2-169).
LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-109
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-110 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN
LINKUP
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-111
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOAM
LOC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-112 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-113
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
LOF
1 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-114 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-115
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-116 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFLOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-117
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOFLOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-118 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN
LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-119
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-120 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
1 of 6
2 of 6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-121
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 of 6
4 of 6
5 of 6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-122 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-123
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
6 of 6
LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-124 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOSLDSig
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSLDSig
LOSOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-125
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-O
LOS-OUT
1 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-126 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-127
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-128 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-129
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LOT-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOT-OUT
LPBKLine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-130 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LPBKLine
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-131
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-132 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LSPOW_ALM_W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSPOW_ALM_W
LSTEMP_ALM_W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-133
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details LSSEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-134 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN
1 of 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-135
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-136 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 of 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-137
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-138 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 of 3
MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-139
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-140 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MANSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANSWTIMREF
MANSWTOINT
MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-141
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-142 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-143
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH
Description
Card mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-144 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Power filter mismatch
Shelf mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-146 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MISMATCHFIBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHFIBER
MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-147
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-148 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MIXEDPFUSED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIXEDPFUSED
Description
MMG
MOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-149
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MODOUTOOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-150 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MSIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MSIM
MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-151
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURVDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-152 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-153
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details NOTALLOWED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED
NTPOOSYNC
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-154 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-155
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-156 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-157
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYOVERLAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-158 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHKEYOVERLAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-159
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-160 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-161
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-162 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-163
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-164 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCI
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-165
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-166 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OCIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCIEGR
OPR
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-168 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPRPWRLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRLOW
OPRLOSSHIGH
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-169
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPRLOSSHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-170 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPROOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPROOR
OPR-OUT
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-171
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRTX
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-172 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRUNACHIEVE
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-173
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPTINTBASE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTBASE
OPTINTDET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-174 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPTINTDET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-175
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details OPTINTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSCSSF
PCSGENERATOR
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-177
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLMEGR
PRCDRERR-TOPO
Description
1 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-178 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 of 2
PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-179
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRADJCOMMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJCOMMS
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-180 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-181
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRADJFAILDRP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAILDRP
PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-182 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRMARGIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMARGIN
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-183
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-184 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRTILTSUSP
Description
PWRTILTSUSP
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-185
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAMANGAINFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-186 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RCVROPTPROG
RDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-187
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-188 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
Description
Card missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-189
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-190 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-191
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Card removal/unseat event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-192 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-193
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-194 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details RFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIEGR
Description
RFIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-195
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER
SDBER (RS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-196 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEG-O
SDEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-197
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SDEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-198 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SFMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-199
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SLTMSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SLTMSIG
SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-200 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-201
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-202 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODUEGR
Description
SWEQPT
1 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-203
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-204 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
1 of 2
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-205
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWMTXMOD
1 of 2
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-206 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGCOMMIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-207
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL
1 of 2
2 of 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-208 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SYNCOOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCOOS
1 of 2
2 of 2
SYNCREFUNEQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-209
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details SYSBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-210 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-211
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-212 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-213
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TRANSFERLOGFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRANSFERLOGFL
TRANSFERLOGFT
TRANSFERLOGIP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-214 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TRANSFERLOGIP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMT
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-215
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-216 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TSMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-217
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details UNG/UNP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNG/UNP
UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-218 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-219
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-220 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-221
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-222 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OCH-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OCH-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-223
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OCH-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTS-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-224 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OTS-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OMS-RX
URU-OTS-RX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-225
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OTS-RX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTS-TX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-226 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OTS-TX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-227
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-228 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details URU-OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU-OTU
USALS (rr)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-229
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details USALS (rr)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-230 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details USALS (rr)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-231
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USOCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-232 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCGLOA
VCGSSF
VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-233
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-234 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-235
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGELOW
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-236 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-237
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details VTSFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI
VTSOCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-238 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-239
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-240 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 1-241
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Alarm and condition details WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-242 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
2 2rouble-clearing
T
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the trouble-clearing procedures required to clear the conditions for
the 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16/4.
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-1
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU 2-61
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU 2-61
CARDBOOT 2-62
CARDBOOT (Card Booting) 2-62
CARDINIT 2-63
CARDINIT (Card Initializing) 2-63
CONFIGFAIL 2-64
CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed) 2-64
CONTCOM 2-65
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication) 2-65
CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication) 2-66
CONTEQPT 2-68
CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-68
CONTR 2-70
CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure) 2-70
CONTR-OUT 2-72
CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure) 2-72
CRDINIT 2-74
CRDINIT (Card Identification Event) 2-74
DATAERR 2-75
DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout) 2-75
DATAFLT 2-77
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure) 2-77
DBBKUP-IP 2-79
DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress) 2-79
DBFL 2-80
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure) 2-80
DBFT 2-81
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure) 2-81
DBINVALID 2-82
DBINVALID (Database invalid) 2-82
DBMEMTRF 2-84
DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure) 2-84
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-3
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP 2-86
DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress) 2-86
DBUNSYNC 2-87
DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are not synchronized) 2-87
DEG 2-88
DEG (Signal Degrade - ODU) 2-88
DISCOVERMOD 2-89
DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered) 2-89
DORMANTUSER 2-90
DORMANTUSER (User inactive) 2-90
EBER 2-91
EBER (Excessive BER) 2-91
EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER) 2-92
ETHCSF 2-94
ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure) 2-94
EQPT 2-95
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-95
EQPT (Card Failure - Device) 2-96
EQPTBOOT 2-98
EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure) 2-98
EQPTDGR 2-100
EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - Device) 2-100
EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-103
EQPTDGROCH 2-105
EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-105
EQPTDGR-OUT 2-107
EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication Failure) 2-107
EQPTDGROCH-OUT 2-109
EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker Communication 2-109
Failure)
EQPTPORT 2-111
EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device) 2-111
ENV 2-113
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-5
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-9
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-11
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN 2-287
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect) 2-287
OCHUNKNOWN 2-289
OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected) 2-289
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT 2-291
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected) 2-291
OCI 2-293
OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU) 2-293
OCIEGR 2-294
OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU) 2-294
OPR 2-295
OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range) 2-295
OPRLOSSHIGH 2-297
OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range Loss Too High between DCM 2-297
Ports of LD)
OPRLOSSLOW 2-299
OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low) 2-299
OPRPWRHIGH 2-301
OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too High) 2-301
OPRPWRLOW 2-303
OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too Low) 2-303
OPROOR 2-305
OPROOR (Optical power received out of range) 2-305
OPR-OUT 2-307
OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range) 2-307
OPRTX 2-308
OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable) 2-308
OPRUNACHIEVE 2-311
OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable) 2-311
OPTINTBASE 2-315
OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed) 2-315
OPTINTDET 2-316
OPTINTDET (Optical Intrusion Detected) 2-316
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTSUSP 2-317
OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion Monitoring Suspended) 2-317
OSCSSF 2-318
OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC) 2-318
PCSGENERATOR 2-319
PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active) 2-319
PLM 2-320
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) 2-320
PLMEGR 2-321
PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU) 2-321
PRCDRERR 2-322
PRCDRERR 2-322
PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id) 2-323
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology) 2-324
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid) 2-325
PRCDRERR-TOPO-OUT 2-327
PWR 2-329
PWR 2-329
PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker 2-330
off or voltage low)
PWRADJCOMMS 2-332
PWRADJCOMMS (Inter NE communication timeout blocking power 2-332
adjustment)
PWRADJFAIL 2-335
2-335
PWRADJFAIL (Aborted) 2-336
PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that Location) 2-337
PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - Cross Connect 2-338
Provisioned)
PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) 2-339
PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain); 2-340
PWRADJFAIL (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain)
PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited) 2-342
PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem) 2-344
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-13
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEGR 2-453
SDEGR (Egress Signal Degrade - ODU) 2-453
SFMISMATCH 2-454
SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch) 2-454
SLTMSIG 2-455
SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the required accuracy 2-455
limits (not Protected or Protection not Available))
SSF 2-456
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU) 2-456
SSFODU 2-458
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU) 2-458
SSFODUEGR 2-460
SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU) 2-460
SWEQPT 2-462
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised); SWEQPT 2-462
(Protection switching equipment failure)
SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised) 2-463
SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure) 2-467
SWFTDWN 2-469
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress) 2-469
Committing the Software Upgrade 2-470
Backing out the Software Upgrade 2-471
SWMTXMOD 2-472
SWMTXMOD 2-472
SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure) 2-473
SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired) 2-475
SWUPGCOMMIT 2-476
SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)) 2-476
SWUPGFAIL 2-477
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed) 2-477
SYNCOOS 2-483
SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or Protection not 2-483
Available)) / SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into holdover)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-17
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR 2-537
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection) 2-537
WTR 2-539
WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect) 2-539
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Structure of safety statements
Safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety statements
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-21
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Structure of safety statements
Safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Safety precautions
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Disconnecting cables and/or replacing circuit packs may disrupt service.
Before taking action, determine the extent of service disruption caused by disconnecting
cables or replacing a circuit pack. Then, perform the action(s) deemed appropriate in
light of the traffic being carried and the nature of the failure.
Many trouble-clearing procedures require actions that are service affecting. These actions
are indicated by a caution message indicating the extent of the service disruption as
shown above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AIS Line/MS
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AISL
AIS Line/MS
The card is receiving AISL from the equipment connected to the client receive port. This
condition on a network port occurs when some upstream line terminating equipment is
exhibiting a failure that sends an AISL signal to the downstream line terminating entity.
This is a non-reportable condition and the user must manually retrieve the condition from
the NE or card to view it. This alarm applies to transparent services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-23
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Client Port AISL
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the equipment that is connected to the client port where the AISL condition is
being raised. Refer to the manufacturer's user manuals to determine if the equipment is
generating the AISL condition and resolve the condition. If the external equipment is not
transmitting the AISL condition then the problem is with the card where the AISL
condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the AISL condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Client Port AISL
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-25
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AIS - ODU
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - ODU
The AIS ODU condition indicates that the OT port has detected an ODU-AIS at the
ODUk level.
This condition may be caused by the following reasons:
The far-end OT port has a LOS/LOF failure
OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AISOTU
AISL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AISOTU
The AISOTU condition indicates that the OT port has detected an OTU-AIS at the ODUk
level.
This condition may be caused by the following reasons:
The input signal has OTU-AIS pattern
The input signal is severely degraded
The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43SCA1, 43STA1P,
43STX4P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if the connected equipment is provisioned to send OTU-AIS pattern. Provision the
connected equipment to send a normal OTU signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the client equipment does not send OTU-AIS, perform the corrective actions in the
procedure LOF (Loss Of Frame) (p. 2-180).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-27
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal); ALLCHANMISS-OUT
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
This alarm is the result of a problem at an upstream NE or upstream span.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the lightpath and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. This may
involve performing the steps in ALLCHANMISS-OUT (p. 2-31) at the NE containing
the trouble point(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the problem persists, attempt an egress adjust on the egress amplifier on the NE
identified in Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-29
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate
the unexpected change in loss in the network. Refer the problem to network planning.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the lightpath. This will identify the cards and ports on this NE to look at
first during this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the cards that are in the NE through path and confirm that all ports and cards on
the through path are administratively up
1. To examine the card state, enter the following command. Observe the admin state and
operational state of each of the cards along the THRU path:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-31
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Set any of the cards that are administratively down to up. To bring a card Admin Up:
3. To examine the port state, enter the following command. Observe the administrative
state and operational state of each of the ports along the THRU path:
4. Set any of the ports that are administratively down to up. To bring a port Admin Up:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the status of the cross-connects that pass through the port
1. List the cross-connects:
CLI config xc a-end shelf slot port z-end shelf slot port
band channel state up
4 Verify that the cards and ports upstream of the LD's DCM or Line In port (that is, within
the NE for Egress amp, line port faces external to the NE for Ingress amp) are alarm free.
Resolve any alarms on cards/ports that are upstream of the LD pack, using the
information gathered in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the LD's DCM or Line In port, that the
fiber is the correct type, and that the other end of the fiber is connected properly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ALLCHANMISS-OUT (C-Band Loss of signal)
ALLCHANMISS-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the input power to the alarmed port is within limits:
If the power is too low, verify that the fiber is not damaged or dirty, and clean or replace if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem is not resolved, then replace the card. Refer to Replacing System
Components (p. 3-51).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-33
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)
AMPDISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMPDISABLED
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325A, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any temperature alarms on the shelf. If so, check the airflow of the
shelf, filler card presence, and ambient air temperature. Resolve any air flow obstructions
or air-conditioner issues.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AMPDISABLED (Amplifier Disabled)
AMPDISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-35
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRLINE (APR Active - Line)
APRLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRLINE
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, RA2P
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the ingress amplifier that is connected to the egress amplifier reporting the
APR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check whether an APROSC condition is active on the egress amplifier at either end of the
span. If so, proceed toAPROSC (p. 2-39) to clear the APROSC condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that the OSCs at both ends of the span are set to OC3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRLINE (APR Active - Line)
APRLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The APRLINE condition will automatically clear up to 100 seconds after the ingress LOS
condition has been cleared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-37
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRNODE (APR Active - Node)
APRNODE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRNODE
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If no services are provisioned at the input to the LD pack, provision at least one service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If services are provisioned at the input to the LD pack, proceed to LOS (p. 2-197) to
clear the LOS condition.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APROSC (APR Limited - OSC Disabled)
APROSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APROSC
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OSC provisioning at both ends of the span by looking at the connected ingress
LD, and also at the ingress LD at the far end of the span.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set both OSCs to OC3. The condition will automatically clear within 100 seconds.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-39
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRSWITCH (APR Active Port Switch)
APRSWITCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRSWITCH
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, RA2P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRTOPO (APR Active - Invalid Topology)
APRTOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRTOPO
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B, RA2P
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-41
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRUNAVAIL (APR unavailable - monitoring card booting)
APRUNAVAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAIL
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B
Corrective Action
The alarm clears automatically after the reboot has been completed. No corrective action
is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APRUNAVAILOSC (APR Limited - OSC SFP failure)
APRUNAVAILOSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APRUNAVAILOSC
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-43
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSB
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSB condition. Note the protection
group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure Determining the Far End of a
Service (p. 3-25) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the APSB alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the directionality of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-45
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSB (APS protection switching byte failure)
APSB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log out of the far end NE if this solves the problem.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Replacing and reconnecting optical patch cords may be service affecting. It is
recommended to replace and reconnect optical patch cords during a maintenance
window.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSCM condition. Note the
protection group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure Determining the Far End of a
Service (p. 3-25) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the APSCM alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-47
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the direction of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSCM (APS Channel Mismatch)
APSCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the card is in the upgrade state then wait for upgrade to complete. The upgrade is
complete when the action progress is 100% and the action status is complete. The near
end alarm should clear after the upgrade is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the problem persists, invoke a manual switch onto the currently active line.
1. Determine the currently active line:
2. Perform a manual switch to the active line. For example, if the working path is
currently active then the following commands would be used.
If the protection path is currently active then the following commands would be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-49
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSMM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the port that is reporting the APSMM alarm. This is the port at the end of the
protection group currently configured for bidirectional switching.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port that is raising the Mode
Mismatch alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the network plan to determine the desired directionality for the protection group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures APSMM (APS Mode Mismatch)
APSMM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the desired directionality for the protection group is unidirectional, change the
protection mode at the near end to uni-directional:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the desired directionality for the protection group is bi-directional, change the
protection mode at the far end to bi-directional:
1. Determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card reporting the
APSMM alarm. Perform the procedure Determining the Far End of a Service
(p. 3-25).
2. Login to the far-end NE.
3. Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port on the far end NE, as
determined in item1 above. This is the port at the end of the protection group
currently configured for uni-directional switching.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-51
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ASONTOPO (Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action
ASONTOPO Required)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASONTOPO
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability All cards
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check fibers on the through path containing the AID where the ASONTOPO alarm is
raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Note the AID where the ASONTOPO is raised and then using NE CLI or WebUI to clear
the ASONTOPO alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If no service is present over the AID where the ASONTOPO was raised, create an
unprotected LSP over the AID where the ASONTOPO was raised (must be a unprotected
LSP so that control plane will not remove cross connect if another problem is
encountered).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check for any other alarms (e.g. power adjust required) and follow their corresponding
corrective action procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ASONTOPO (Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action
ASONTOPO Required)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-53
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AUTHFAIL (Authentication Failure)
AUTHFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTHFAIL
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AUTORESET (Card Autonomous Reset)
AUTORESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTORESET
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2325A, AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR8,
CWR8-88, EC, FLC, OPS, OSCT, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC,
RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
No corrective action is required for AUTORESET. However, if repeated AUTORESET
events are reported against a single card, reseat the card. If the condition persists, replace
the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-55
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures AUTOSWTIMREF (Automatic Switch Timing Reference)
AUTOSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUTOSWTIMREF
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures B1SD (B1 Signal Degrade)
B1SD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B1SD
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1
This procedure details the corrective action for an B1SD against the OT port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, SDBER (p. 2-448) to clear this alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-57
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures BASELINE
BASELINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BASELINE
BASELINE
The BASELINE autonomous message is a transient condition issued after a analog PM
baseline operation is executed.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
Received power may not be within the acceptable range
The data rate may be inconsistent
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12,
11DPE12E, 11DPM1211QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT,
and OT cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU
BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDI
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU2), request corrective action by client operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-59
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures BDIEGR (Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIEGR
Severity NR
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDIEGR against the OT port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU2), request corrective action by client operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU2), request corrective action by client operators.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-61
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CARDBOOT (Card Booting)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDBOOT
No corrective action is required. This alarm clears automatically once the card is booted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CARDINIT (Card Initializing)
CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
Corrective Action
This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm. No corrective
action is required.
The condition clears or is replaced by a card alarm. If the alarm does not clear, then
follow the procedure CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) (p. 2-68).
Note: To get correct PM counts after an MSC cold reboot, initialize the PM registers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-63
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONFIGFAIL (Line Card Configuration Failed)
CONFIGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONFIGFAIL
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTCOM
Corrective Action
Refer to CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication) (p. 2-66).
Note: If this alarm is present on a card when the master shelf Equipment Controller
undergoes a reset or a switch of activity, this alarm re-appears as a Card missing
alarm. Refer to REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing) (p. 2-440).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-65
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability SHELF-{2-8}
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 When adding a new subshelf , the rotary dial should be configured with valid shelf ids
(0x02 to 0x18). Check the rotary dial and set it to a valid shelf ID, if applicable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the intershelf timing and control cable on the active master shelf controller and
observe the link status LED on the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the cable is connected and the link status LED is off, verify that the cable is properly
connected at both ends and reconnect it if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the link status LED remains off when the cable is reconnected, verify that the
subtended shelf is powered on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the subtended shelf is powered on and the cable is connected but the link status LED
remains off, ensure that there is at least one working Equipment Controller in the
subtended shelf (both Activity and Status LEDs should be green). Do not proceed until
there is a working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf. Once there is at least one
working Equipment Controller in the subtended shelf, replace the intershelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTCOM (Inter-shelf loss of communication)
CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
communications and timing cable and see if the link comes back up.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-67
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)
CONTEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTEQPT
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability Equipment Controller, FLC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device)
CONTEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-69
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)
CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2325B,
CWR, MESH4, OPS, OSCT, WR, WTOCM
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker information for the detect points
on-card are invalid.
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker failure)
CONTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-71
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CONTR-OUT (Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection
CONTR-OUT failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CONTR-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, OSCT
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, wavelength tracking information for the detect
points on the card are invalid.
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-73
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CRDINIT (Card Identification Event)
CRDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CRDINIT
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAERR (Data Error or Timeout)
DATAERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAERR
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SCX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2318A, CWR, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT,
SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAERR condition raised against it:
2 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller. This will cause a Equipment
Controller switch in a redundant configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Delete the services and de-provision the alarmed card. Re-provision the card with the
same parameters as was previously done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-76 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAFLT
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, CWR, CWR8-88,
Equipment Controller, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS,
OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-77
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there is a software mismatch on the NE. If so, resolve the software issue
first. The NE should be running with a committed software load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAFLT condition raised against it:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller. This will cause a Equipment
Controller switch in a redundant configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Delete the services and de-provision the alarmed card. Re-provision the card with the
same parameters as was previously done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBBKUP-IP (Database Backup In-Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBBKUP-IP
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
The NE will clear the DBBKUP-IP standing condition when the database backup file
transfer has completed successfully, failed, or been cancelled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-79
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)
DBFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)
DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-81
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBINVALID (Database invalid)
DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability Equipment Controller, System
Corrective Action
Whenever possible, backup the database prior to unseating the Equipment Controller (see
Backing Up a Database (p. 3-20)).
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this condition occurs after a downgrade, then perform the steps in Restoring a
Database (p. 3-21) to restore the pre-upgrade database to the Equipment Controller.
Note: The redundant Equipment Controller, if one is in its slot, will synchronize with
the active Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If this condition occurs after user panel replacement, a database backup (previously saved
for this NE) must be restored to the NE from a remote database backup and restore server,
with the special keyword "force".
The steps are as follows:
1. Re-provision the user panel OADM port details for this NE.
2. Re-provision the static routing and gateway information for this NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-82 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBINVALID (Database invalid)
DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Re-provision the database server information, perform the steps in Backing Up a
Database (p. 3-20) and Restoring a Database (p. 3-21) for the database backup and
restore procedures.
4. Enter the CLI command config database restore force to bring the database
from a remote server to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If this condition occurs after the replacement of a Equipment Controller, and there is no
protection (redundant Equipment Controller), then perform the steps in Restoring a
Database (p. 3-21) to restore the database to the Equipment Controller.
Note: It is crucial to have the backup database be a duplicate of the one running on
the NE prior to replacing the Equipment Controller. Any data not backed up will be
lost and may result in lost services and interruption in traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Review of the NE logs may provide an indication of the corruption of the database by
way of a failed audit function resulting in CRC errors. If the DBINVALID condition is
present due to a corruption of the database, then perform the steps in Restoring a
Database (p. 3-21) to restore the database to the Equipment Controller from a valid
database backup file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-83
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)
DBMEMTRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBMEMTRF
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability Equipment Controller, System
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the software load on each of the two Equipment Controllers and verify that they
match. If the loads are different, force the Equipment Controller with the incorrect load to
upgrade to the correct running load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the Equipment Controller with the condition and examine the connector on the
back of the card for damage, including bent or broken pins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the connector on the backplane for damage. If there is damage to the backplane
of the shelf, contact your service representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-insert the Equipment Controller into its original slot and allow the card to initialize.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBMEMTRF (Database synchronization failure)
DBMEMTRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller with the DBMEMTRF condition with a new unit. If
the condition is not cleared, replace the second Equipment Controller with a new unit.
Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-85
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBRSTR-IP (Database Restore In Progress)
DBRSTR-IP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBRSTR-IP
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
The NE will clear the DBRSTR-IP standing condition when the database restoration file
transfer has completed successfully, failed, or been cancelled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-86 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DBUNSYNC (The active and standby Main EC databases are
DBUNSYNC not synchronized)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBUNSYNC
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-87
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DEG (Signal Degrade - ODU)
DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEG
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA,
43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a DEG against the OT port. At the end of
each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clean the input fiber at the receiver, and check if the input power is within the specified
range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If it does not clear the alarm, check if there is any power management or optical channel
alarm reported on the link. Perform the corrective action for clearing these alarms on the
link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Measure the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) with at the received amplifier with an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check if the OSNR is within the range specified by the EPT.
Perform the actions to improve the system OSNR.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For 40G and 100G coherent cards only: Retrieve the monitoring values for chromatic
dispersion (CD), Differential Group Delay (DGD), and Frequency offset. Check if the
values are in the normal range. If not, perform the actions to optimize the optical link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-88 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DISCOVERMOD (Pluggable Module Discovered)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DISCOVERMOD
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
MajorApplicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-89
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures DORMANTUSER (User inactive)
DORMANTUSER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DORMANTUSER
1 This user may be deleted from the NE by using one of the following commands:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-90 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER (Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBER
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for an EBER condition against the OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-91
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for EBER-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the EBER-O conditions is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multimode/single-mode) and that the other end of
the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-92 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EBER-O (Optical Supervision Channel Excessive BER)
EBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system, remove the fiber from the receive port where
the EBER-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed, measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card. If the
EBER-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See Replacing an SFP Module
(p. 3-57). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-93
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ETHCSF (Ethernet Client Signal Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETHCSF
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E
The alarm is cleared when the MEP receives a CCM frame with interface status TLV of
Up.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the remote peer Ethernet client status. The remote peer client port LOS/LSS
triggers the local ETHCSF.
CLI alarm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-94 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-95
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A,
AM2325B, CWR, FAN, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSC, OSCT, PF,
RA2P, SFC, SFD, SVAC, USRPNL, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. If
this condition is raised against the user panel or a fan tray, then after each step warm reset
the active Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-96 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-97
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTBOOT
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1,
43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,F
4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B, CWR, MESH4,
MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. If
this condition is raised against the user panel or a fan tray, then after each step warm reset
the active Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-98 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTBOOT (Card failure - boot failure)
EQPTBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-99
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - Device)
EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, CWR, OPS, OSCT, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT,
RA2P, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
Yes Continue with Step 2.
No Proceed to Step 8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-100 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - Device)
EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the OPT and OPR parameters are blank go to Step 3. If not, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the OPT and OPR parameters are blank go to Step 4. If not, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the firmware profile for the card is lower than the versions shown in the table below,
then the firmware should be upgraded (see Selecting a Specific Firmware Version
(p. 3-26)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-101
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Card Degrade - Device)
EQPTDGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-102 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-103
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-104 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, CWR, MESH4, OSC, OSCT, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-105
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-106 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGR-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-107
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGR-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGR-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-108 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTDGROCH-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, OSC, OSCT, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-109
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTDGROCH-OUT (Port Degrade - Wavelength Tracker
EQPTDGROCH-OUT Communication Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-110 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device)
EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPTPORT
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SCX10,
112SX10L, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1,
43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,
4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-111
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EQPTPORT (Port Failure - Device)
EQPTPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-112 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ENV (Environmental Input [1-8] active)
ENV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENV
1 Define the environmental input defined by using one of the following commands:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-113
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ESCLATCHFAIL (Channel Attempted Escape from Latchup
ESCLATCHFAIL Routine Failed)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESCLATCHFAIL
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the add or mesh path fibering of the channel for misfibering, kinks or
disconnections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-114 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ESCLATCHFAIL (Channel Attempted Escape from Latchup
ESCLATCHFAIL Routine Failed)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for possible pack failures along the mesh or add paths. If there are any alarms
raised, troubleshoot them before continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a Path Power Trace to determine where any possible losses may be occurring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
If... Then...
the configuration includes a WTOCM pack, verify that it is working correctly and is
receiving reliable wavekeys:
CLI: config interface wtocm
sh/sl/IN[1-4] detail
WEBUI: Select the card, click the Port
Details tab, and view the transmit power.
the configuration includes a MESH4 pack, verify that it is working correctly and the
amplifier is operating within configured
parameters:
CLI: config interface mesh4
sh/sl/SIGIN detail
WEBUI: Select the card, click the Port
Details tab, and view the transmit power.
the configuration includes an OT or SVAC, verify that channel power is present at the
control point:
CLI: config interface card_type
sh/sl/pt detail
WEBUI: Select the card, click the Port
Details tab, and view the transmit power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the ingress LD is admin up and is functioning properly. Perform a warm reset
of the card if necessary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-115
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ESCLATCHFAIL (Channel Attempted Escape from Latchup
ESCLATCHFAIL Routine Failed)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the CWR8-88, CWR8 or WR8-88A is admin up and functioning properly. If
not, perform a warm reset of the card.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset warm
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the alarm is still present, manually set the WSS controller attenuation value by
configuring a value at the Sig Out port to set the WSS controller to a more useful
attenuation value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once the alarm is cleared, trigger an egress adjustment to optimize the channel powers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-116 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ESCLATCHFAIL (Channel Attempted Escape from Latchup
ESCLATCHFAIL Routine Failed)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 If the alarm is still present, then provision the NE to the original power settings and then
run an egress adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-117
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures ETR-MISMATCHMOD (Extended Temp Range Violation:
ETR-MISMATCHMOD non-ETR Pluggable Module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETR-MISMATCHMOD
Severity MJ
Service affecting? Yes
MajorApplicability 11DPE12E, A2325A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-118 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EXCESSLOAD (Excessive Current Load)
EXCESSLOAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOAD
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,
4DPA4, A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2325B, CWR, Equipment Controller, OPS, OSCT,
SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Reprovision the shelf capacity attribute (EXPECTED_AMPS) with the new value.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-119
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures EXCESSLOSS (Fiber Connection Loss Too High)
EXCESSLOSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXCESSLOSS
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SNA1, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-120 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure)
FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, MVAC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully remove and reseat the pluggable module that is reporting the FACTERM-DEV
condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap the fiber jumpers connected to the pluggable module and replace the
pluggable module with another unit of the same type. Refer to Replacing an SFP
Module (p. 3-57). Reconnect the fiber jumpers as they were before.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-121
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FACTERM-DEV (Pluggable Module SEEP Failure)
FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-122 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FANSPEEDHIGH (Fan Speed is too high)
FANSPEEDHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDHIGH
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-123
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FANSPEEDLOW (Fan speed is too low)
FANSPEEDLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDLOW
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-124 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FANSPEEDMAN (Fan speed manually set to maximum)
FANSPEEDMAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FANSPEEDMAN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability FAN
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-125
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FECECSD (Pre-FEC Signal Degrade)
FECECSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECECSD
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11QPA4, 43SCA1, 43STA1P,
43STX4P
This procedure details the corrective action for an FECECSD against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure, DEG (p. 2-88). Because it is FEC corrected BER, it does not
affect service unless another alarm exists on the port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-126 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FECUBCSD (Post-FEC Signal Degrade)
FECUBCSD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FECUBCSD
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4,
11STAR1, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4P
This procedure details the corrective action for an FECUBCSD against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clean the input fiber at the receiver, and check if the input power is within the specified
range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check if there is any power management or optical channel alarm reported on the link.
Perform the corrective action for clearing these alarms on the link.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Measure the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) with at the received amplifier with an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check if the OSNR is within the range specified by the EPT.
Perform the actions to improve the system OSNR.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-127
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANLFI (Far End Local Fault)
FELANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLFI
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for FELANLFI against the OT port. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Proceed with the procedure for clearing LANLFI (see LANLFI (p. 2-161)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-128 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-129
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)
FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLSS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-130 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FELANRFI (Far End Remote Fault)
FELANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANRFI
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-131
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FELOS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)
FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the LANLSS procedure (see LANLSS (p. 2-164)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-132 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)
FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPORTMISMATCH
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the two ports in the protection group at the near end, and the two ports at the far
end.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision the near end and far end ports with the same signal rate and format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the timeslot assignments so that the same ports are used at both ends. For
example, the near end port C3 must be connected to far end port C3.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-133
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FEPRLF (Far End Protection Line Failure)
FEPRLF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPRLF
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 11DPE12, 11DPM12, 11QPA4,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
Do all steps at the far end node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for faults on the protection side line port, or the protection side card.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List >Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-134 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FPGAFAIL (FPGA Download or Programming Failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAFAIL
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SCX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, CWR8, CWR8-88,
MESH4, MVAC, OPS, RA2P, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGAFAIL condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-135
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FPGAINIT (FPGA Initializing)
FPGAINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGAINIT
Severity NA
Service affecting? No (However, a cold reset of the card issued to initiate FPGA
programming is service affecting if the card is currently carrying
services.)
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2318A, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT,
SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 No steps are required to clear the FPGAINIT alarm. Some FPGA programming steps can
take as long as 45 minutes. Monitor progress using one of the following commands:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-136 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FPGATIMEOUT (FPGA Timeout)
FPGATIMEOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGATIMEOUT
Severity MN
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPFGT, AM2318A, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS,
OSCT, SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the FPGATIMEOUT condition is raised.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-137
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDSWTIMREF (Forced Switch Timing Reference)
FRCDSWTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDSWTIMREF
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-138 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)
FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-139
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)
FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWPR
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-140 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FRNGSYNC (System clock is in free running synchronization
mode)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRNGSYNC
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYNC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-141
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FWPENDINGOBSOLETE (Firmware on this pack is about to
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE become obsolete with the software release upgrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWPENDINGOBSOLETE
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR8, CWR8-88,
MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Provision a firmware bundle that will be valid after software upgrade or provision the
default firmware bundle for the card (see Corrective Action (p. 2-145)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-142 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)
FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWUPGRADEPENDING
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, SVAC,
WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-143
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FWUPGRADEPENDING (Firmware upgrade pending)
FWUPGRADEPENDING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To initiate a cold reset to download the recommended firmware version for the affected
pack, perform a cold reset of the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-144 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT,
SVAC, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-145
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT (Firmware version on this pack is
FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT not the default version for this software release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the default firmware bundle is provisioned for the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the default firmware bundle is not provisioned in the previous step, then provision the
default firmware bundle for the card.
CLI config firmware card card_type shelf slot config firmware card
card_type shelf slot
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-146 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures HIBER (High BER)
HIBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIBER
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STGE12, 43SCX4,
43SCX4L
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a HIBER condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-147
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures HIGAIN (Amplifier Out of Operational Range: Gain too High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HIGAIN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B
Corrective Action
None. This is a transitory alarm that is raised for a maximum of 30 seconds while the
amplifier attempts to limit the output power. If after 30 seconds the output power cannot
be limited, a CONTEQPT (Card Failure - Device) (p. 2-68) alarm is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-148 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures HLDOVRSYNC (System timing is in autonomous holdover
HLDOVRSYNC synchronization mode)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HLDOVRSYNC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-149
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures HWNOTSUPPORTED (Hardware not supported for current
HWNOTSUPPORTED configuration)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HWNOTSUPPORTED
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability ECb
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-150 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INSERTMOD (Pluggable Module Inserted)
INSERTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INSERTMOD
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-151
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMP (Card over temperature)
INTTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPHIGH
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR, Equipment Controller,
FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, PF, RA2P, SVAC,
WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure High Temperature Troubleshooting (p. 3-28).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-152 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMPLOW (Card under temperature)
INTTEMPLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPLOW
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR, Equipment Controller,
FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, PF, RA2P, SVAC,
WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that no environmental issues are present where the network element resides.
Resolve any existing issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their lower limit (within 10 C).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the alarmed card. See Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-153
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INTTEMP (Optics over temperature)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTTEMPOPT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B,
CWR8, MESH4, RA2P, WR
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure High Temperature Troubleshooting (p. 3-28).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-154 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INTRUSION
INTRUSION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTRUSION
INTRUSION
The INTRUSION alarm lists the user IDs of users currently locked-out of the 1830 PSS
due to intrusion violations whenever there is a change to the user database. Subsequent
login attempts by that user shall be denied until the user profile is unlocked (enabled).
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-155
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INTRUSIONEVT (Excessive Invalid Login Attempts)
INTRUSION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective action
To clear the INTRUSIONEVT alarm, complete either Step 1 OR Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-156 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INVALIDEGRESS (Invalid or no egress port defined)
INVALIDEGRESS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVALIDEGRESS
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AM2125A, AM2125B, RA2P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the topology between ingress and egress LD (if there is egress LD). Check the
external topology for the ingress LD line port. If the topology is missing, add the
topology and re-run the egress adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that Opposite Direction Port field is provisioned correctly for the egress LD
Lineout port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-157
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
The OPS pack currently has an invalid switch threshold value provisioned. The threshold
must be greater than -30 dBm to clear the condition.
When a cross-connect is added for the first time, the INVALIDTHRESHOLD alarm is
raised for ports A and B, and then clears after a few seconds. If the XC is deleted and
reentered, then the INVALIDTHRESHOLD alarms is not raised.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability OPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
no (auto is being used) proceed to Step 3.
yes proceed to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that no LOS alarms are present on the A or B input ports that would inhibit the
switch calculation. Proceed to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Set the threshold to a value greater than -30 dBm based on engineering rules for the
incoming channel power levels.
CLI config interface opsa shelf/slot/port switch switchthresh
dBm value
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-158 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INVALIDTHRESHOLD
INVALIDTHRESHOLD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TLI ED-OCH:::SWTHRESH
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-159
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures INVENTORYERROR (Card Inventory Error)
INVENTORYERROR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INVENTORYERROR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear the INVENTORYERROR alarm, remove and replace the affected device.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-160 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLFI (Local Fault)
LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLFI
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a client port, verify that the source is
correctly transmitting the Ethernet signal. Refer to its manufacturer's documentation for
any corrective actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the LANLFI condition has been raised on a Network port, retrieve the alarm
information from the upstream path to determine if any failure is present. If there is an
indication of failure upstream of the port where the LANLFI is raised, fix this problem
first.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-161
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLFI (Local Fault)
LANLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LANLFI condition is raised.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-162 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLOS (LAN port LOS)
LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLOS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If fiber is damaged or cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-163
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLSS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-164 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANRFI
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve alarms and conditions for the local node that has the RFI condition on its receive
port. Examine them and identify faults on the services supporting the devices that have
the RFI condition. Resolve any issues with respect to these faults first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for the far end device. Examine the devices associated with the same
services as in Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-165
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LANRFI (Remote Fault Indication)
LANRFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset on the local card where the LANRFI condition is raised.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset on the upstream device that is sending the LANRFI condition
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reseat the local card. If this does not fix the problem, reseat the far-end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the alarmed card. Follow the return and repair process to return the card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-166 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LASEREOL (Laser end of life)
LASEREOL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LASEREOL
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11STAR1
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-167
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LCK (Locked - OTU)
LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCK
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
the affected client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-168 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LCKEGR (Egress Locked - ODU)
LCKEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCKEGR
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCKEGR condition declared
on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
the affected client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-169
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)
LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD
Severity SA
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LFD condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Inspect the OCh trail which is used as a server transport layer for GFP stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any alarms are detected on OCh trail, locate the farthest upstream point and follow the
procedure for clearing this alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If Step 5 does not clear the problem replace the local OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-170 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LFIEGR (Remote Client Local Fault)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFIEGR
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure LANLFI (p. 2-161) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-171
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LINKDOWN (Link down)
LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, EC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the LINKDOWN condition to the associated card and port upstream.
Verify that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state
is Up, then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card's client receive port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the LINKDOWN condition is raised and clean the
fiber and the bulkhead connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 2 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-172 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LINKDOWN (Link down)
LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-173
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LINKUP (Link Up)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKUP
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability FAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-174 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOAM (Loss of Alignment Marker Lock)
LOAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOAM
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SNA1
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-175
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOC (Loss of Continuity)
LOC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOC
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E
This alarm is raised when an MEP receives CCM frames with an incorrect MEG ID. The
alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames with the correct MEG ID.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MEP mepcc is enable and the check the OCH the alarms/conditions along
the OCh trail.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-176 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)
LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location of the protection group member that
has the active condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure Determining the Far End of a
Service (p. 3-25) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the LOCKOUTOFPR alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to determine the
identity of the protection group involved in the active condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-177
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)
LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the following command on both the near-end and far-end NEs and verify that the
protection path is alarm free. Use the group ID/AID identified in Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Determine if there are any outstanding alarms on the system pertaining to the service.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-178 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFTIMREF
The Lock out of a Timing Reference from selection condition occurs when the OT port
has detected an LOCKOUTOFTIMREF at the LINEREF layer.
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-179
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF (Loss Of Frame)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-180 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOF against the client port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the optical receive power on the port where the LOF condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port that it is connected to. Check that the
source is a compatible type with the same line rate as expected at the receive port. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (refer to the source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the
output power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-181
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Client Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOF is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
threshold, procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
If the LOF condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the client port has an pluggable module installed, verify the pluggable module (this
includes checking the pluggable module and replacing if necessary; do this before cold
reset or reseat as it does not affect other client signals).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-182 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
The following procedure details the corrective action for an LOF against the network
port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the probable network
trouble-point for the light-path. The procedure guides the user through the investigation
and resolution of the problem tracing back through to the source of the light path.
If the problem is the head end of the path (the transponder card at the source) then:
1. Check the add NE for conditions against the OT port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source card network-facing port is administratively UP and
transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
CLI show interface <shelf slot port>(perform at both the near and far
ends)
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-183
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If encapsulation does not match, then configure the incorrect side to match up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that there are no channel alarms or conditions for this channel on the near-end NE.
If there are, clear them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query for the optical receive power on the network port where the LOF condition is
present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the optical power is below the required using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
threshold, procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a line loop-back on the far end network port. If this resolves the local (near-end)
alarm then the problem is associated with the far end card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-184 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Transponder Network Port Loss of Frame
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-185
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOF-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOF-O condition is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-186 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the LOF-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
threshold for the type of pluggable module procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
installed power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOF-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-187
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOF-O (Incoming SUPVY LOF)
LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See Replacing an SFP Module
(p. 3-57). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-188 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress)
LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFEGR
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4,11STAR1 11STMM10, 43SCX,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 43STA1P, 4DPA4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LOFEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure LOF (Loss Of Frame) (p. 2-180) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-189
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOFLOM (Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM -
LOFLOM ODU))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFLOM
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPM12
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOFLOM declared on the
Lo-ODU entity at an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not,
continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OT Line port for any other alarm conditions at OTU2 or ODU2 level. If there
are any, clear the failures.
CLI alm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-190 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOFLOM (Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM -
LOFLOM ODU))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the OT Line Port performance monitoring parameters in Digital Wrapper Group. If
there are uncorrectable FEC bits, or bit errors at OTU (SM) or bit errors at ODU (PM)
level, check the optical link performance and clear the bit errors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check if the upstream OT ODU multiplexing timeslot format is compatible with alarmed
OT. Provision the proper ODU timeslots.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing a Card (General) (p. 3-52). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-192 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
LOGAIN too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOGAIN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) and locate the likely point that is the
cause of the LOGAIN alarm. This may be on the upstream NE or the local one. Retrieve
alarms and conditions and, using the appropriate corrective actions, resolve these issues
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an egress or ingress amplifier adjust, depending on the type of amplifier that is
raising this alarm. If any adjust fails, there may be other optical power related alarms that
are raised as a result. Resolve these issues by following the appropriate procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-193
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOGAIN (Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain
LOGAIN too low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It is possible that the gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient
to accommodate the unexpected change in loss in the network. Capture the current
operating state of the network, using the 1354 RM-PhM XML network export feature.
Refer the problem to network planning for analysis.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If this does not resolve the issue, then the problem may be with the card itself. Perform a
warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-194 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOM
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E,
11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOM declared on an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOM condition is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-195
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the power is below a minimum threshold, the problem may be upstream from that port.
Visually inspect the OT port connection. Ensure that there are no loose fibers. If so,
connect the fiber properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the immediate upstream OT for any alarm conditions. If there are any, clear the
failures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the OT. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-196 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of Signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-197
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Channel Absent)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, OPS, OSCT, CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, OPS, OSCT,
WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the lightpath. Resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-198 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Channel Absent)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If resolving upstream alarms did not make the alarm clear on the local NE then the
problem may be with this NE. Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the
add cross connect is administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or
Channel alarms/conditions for the associated OT or SVAC. If there are, clear those
alarms/conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the services' ingress point
into the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are numerous instances of this condition occurring on a particular card, check to
see if these alarms are also occurring on the next downstream card. If they are, then
continue with Step 5. If they are not occurring at the next downstream card, then there
may be a problem with the indicated card. Reset the card, and wait for one minute. If the
alarms do not clear, continue with Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the loss in the fiber feeding the port is not higher than expected by comparing
the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than expected, clean the
fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-199
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Channel Absent)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-200 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD Input LOS
The LINE port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS
alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
The received power may not be within the acceptable range
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPLG, AHPHG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, A2325A, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-201
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed: LINE Normal Range: -32.0 dBm measure the power again.
(LINE Normal Range)
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-202 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CWR Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability CWR8, CWR8-88
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-203
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures CWR Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold of using the standard optical fiber jumper
-4.0 to +20 dBm (SIG Normal Range) cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-204 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STX4, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the optical receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power is below the minimum threshold, the problem is upstream from that port.
Continue with Step 3.
the power is within acceptable limits, the problem is with the card itself. Proceed to
Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-205
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port and that it is on. Check that the source
is a compatible type (for example, if you are expecting a single-mode fiber signal (either
1310 or 155x nm), check that the source is not a multi-mode fiber signal (typically 850
nm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter.
If... Then...
the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 5.
the output power is not within acceptable the problem is with the source. Follow the
limits, instructions on debugging from the source
equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP >DOWN > UP.
CLI show interface <shelf slot port>
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold, cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
If the LOS condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-206 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS (Loss of signal)
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-207
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Input LOS
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability MESH4, RA2P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-208 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OMD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability SFCn, SFDn
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the OMD port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode/single mode) and that the other end of
the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold level using the standard optical fiber jumper
provisioned by the 1354 RM-PhM for the type cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
of port measure the power again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-209
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OMD Input LOS
LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-210 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS)
LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSDCM
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325A, AM2325B
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the DCM port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode/single mode) and that the other end of
the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the port where the LOS
is raised and measure the optical power.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-211
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSDCM (From DCM Input LOS)
LOSDCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the optical power is more than 15 dB below using the standard optical fiber jumper
the level coming out of the amplifier DCM cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
port measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-212 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSLDSIG
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPLG, AHPHG, ALPHG, ALPFGT
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS against the SIG port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-213
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSLDSIG (LD SIG Input LOS)
LOSLDSIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the threshold of using the standard optical fiber jumper
-3.0 dBm cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-214 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOSOCM (WTOCM Input LOS)
LOSOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOSOCM
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability WTOCM
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOSOCM against the
WTOCM input port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the fiber is connected between the WTOCM input port and its associated LD MON
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve power level reading on the local port, verify the power in within the normal
operating range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-215
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-O
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for a LOS-O against the OSC port. At the end
of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the LOS-O condition is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-216 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-O (Incoming SUPVY LOS)
LOS-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the adjacent node is provisioned for OC3 format of the OSC signal. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the LOS-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
LOS-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See Replacing an SFP Module
(p. 3-57). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-218 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-O-OUT (Outgoing SUPVY LOS)
LOS-O-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-O-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action to clear LOS-O-OUT at the egress LD. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean both ends or replace the fiber jumper between the ingress LD OSCSFP Out port
and the egress LD OSC In port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-219
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-OUT
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, OSCT, WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-220 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the probable network
trouble point for the service. Resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. If the alarm
originates on the NE where the service enters the network, ensure that the OT or SVAC is
fibered to the correct port on the OMD or CWR8. The OT or SVAC may be connected
directly to the OMD or CWR8 or through another OT or SVAC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If resolving upstream alarms does not clear the alarm on the local NE, then the problem
may be with this NE. Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add
cross connect is administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or channel
alarms/conditions for the associated OT or SVAC. If there are, clear those
alarms/conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point
into the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are numerous instances of this condition occurring on a particular card, check to
see if these alarms are also occurring on the next downstream card. If they are, then
continue with Step 5. If they are not occurring at the next downstream card, then there
may be a problem with the indicated card. Reset the card, and wait for one minute. If the
alarms do not clear, continue with Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the loss in the fiber feeding the port is not higher than expected by comparing
the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than expected, clean the
fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Ensure wavekey provisioning is set the same (either manual or automatic) in all nodes
from A to Z for the channel in alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-221
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Signal) and (Outgoing Channel
LOS-OUT Absent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-222 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS)
LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS-P
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOS-P declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-223
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOS-P (Incoming Payload LOS)
LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of 11STAR1 OT, and the power level is
within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-224 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOT-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Tones)
LOT-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOT-OUT
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for an LOT-OUT condition against the OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the wavekeys that are expected at the pack. Use WEBUI or the Photonic Manager
to retrieve all expected wavekeys at the Line Out port of the LD, or enter the following
CLI command. If no wavekeys are expected at the pack, the condition will remain until a
service with a wavekey is provisioned and detected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-225
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LOT-OUT (Outgoing Loss of Tones)
LOT-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for any of the following alarms or conditions at the upstream line-facing LD at the
preceding node: LOS-P, AMPDISABLED, APR-LINE, ALLCHANMISS, LOS-DCM,
LOS-OUT, ALLCHANMISS-OUT. If any of these alarms is present, follow the
trouble-clearing procedure for the alarm at the preceding node.If no alarms are present,
check the next upstream line-facing LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 2 as necessary back one node at a time as far as the OMS transmit point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that the fibering is correct for the RA2P and the ingress LD. Correct any
misfibering. Note that correcting any misfibering will be service-affecting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-226 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LPBKLINE (Line [Facility] Loopback Active)
LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKLINE
Severity NR
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-227
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)
LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
Severity NR
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11DPE12E,, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-228 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LSPOW_ALM_W (Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross
LSPOW_ALM_W Threshold)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSPOW_ALM_W
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-229
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LSTEMP_ALM_W (Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold)
LSTEMP_ALM_W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSTEMP_ALM_W
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 43STA1P, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-230 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LSSEGR (Remote Client Loss of Synchronization)
LSSEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LSSEGR
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LSSEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure LANLSS (p. 2-164) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-231
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LTC (Loss Of Tandem Connection - TCM)
LTC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTC
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPE12, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for an LTC condition against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OT Line port for any other alarm conditions at OTU2 or ODU2 level. If there
are any, clear the failures.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Condition List.
From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port. Select
the Fault function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-232 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures LTC (Loss Of Tandem Connection - TCM)
LTC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the OT Line Port performance monitoring parameters in Digital Wrapper Group. If
there are uncorrectable FEC bits, or bit errors at OTU (SM) or bit errors at ODU (PM)
level, check the optical link performance and clear the bit errors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the TCM mode of Upstream OT. The correct TCM modes shall be provisioned as
Non-Intrusive Monitoring or Terminated.
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port and the
desired TCM layer. Select the Details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-233
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
MAN maintenance) / MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition -
Port in maintenance) / MAN (Logical removal performed on
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a timing reference)
MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-234 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
MAN maintenance)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-235
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in
MAN maintenance)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
To clear the condition, check with the assigning of connection between the LINEREF and
the physical port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-236 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MANRESET (Card Manual Reset)
MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANRESET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-237
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MANSWTIMREF (Timing selection was switched by a manual
MANSWTIMREF command to a timing reference)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANSWTIMREF
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-238 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MANSWTOINT (Manual Switch to Internal Timing )
MANSWTOINT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANSWTOINT
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYNC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-239
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)
MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWBK
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated <shelf slot port>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-240 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)
MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-241
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch); MISMATCH (Power Filter
Mismatch); MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch),
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-242 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, DCM, CWR,
ITLB, ITLU, MESH4, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SFC, SFD44,
SFD44B, SVAC, WR, WTOCM
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify from the network plan what type of card is supposed to be in that slot.
If... Then...
it is a frequency dependent card (SFC or SFD) ensure the correct frequency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-243
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
it is a DCM card, ensure that it is the correct compensation
distance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the inserted card is the incorrect type, remove the card and insert one that matches the
provisioned type for the slot.
If the provisioning is incorrect, then reconfigure to make the provisioning match the card:
CLI 1. config slot <shelf slot port> state down(Enter this
command for all client ports on the card and then the network port.)
2. config slot <shelf slot> state down
3. config slot <shelf slot> type empty
4. config slot <shelf slot> type <correct type>
WEBUI 1. Select the slot of the desired card, and on the Card Properties window,
select Out of Service in the Primary State field, and click Submit.
2. Click the Delete tab, select Delete this card, and click Submit.
3. On the Provision Card window, select the desired card type in the
Provisioned Type field, and click Submit.
If the provisioning is correct and the card is of a matching type, then there is an issue with
the card itself. Continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-244 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Card Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-245
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
If... Then...
the Power Filter Mismatch alarm is raised after proceed to Step 7.
a new installation on a PSS-32 drop shelf
configuration,
the Power Filter Mismatch alarm is raised for continue with Step 2.
any other reason,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Identify whether the PF Wavelength Tracker function matches shelf Wavelength Tracker
mode. (For example, PFDCA does not support Wavelength Tracker.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf to the correct mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Provision the shelf EXPECTED_AMPS parameter with the correct value: 30, 50, or 70
amps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-246 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Power Filter Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Query the shelf for the actual power filters installed in each shelf:
CLI NE# show pf <shelf/slot>
WEBUI Expand the tree structure of the shelf.
Select Slot 19: PF and/or Slot 36: PF. The Details page in the Provision/Info
tab shows the actual power filter details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 For each PF with MISMATCH alarms, set the expectedamps value to the appropriate
power filter type:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-247
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability SHELF
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Review DCM and SFD44 shelf serial numbers and make corrections as needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-248 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Shelf Mismatch)
MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To delete an existing shelf:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the correct serial number is provisioned, but the wrong DCM or SFD44 module is
connected, replace the module with one which has the correct serial number.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-249
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCHFIBER (Fiber connection mismatch)
MISMATCHFIBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHFIBER
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability WTOCM
Corrective action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the fiberering between LD and WTOCM pack, make sure fibering matches the
WTOCM port provisioning
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-250 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch)
MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCHMOD
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1,
43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4, , 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AM2017B,
AM2325B, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, OSCT
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the type of pluggable module that is currently inserted into the alarmed card.
If... Then...
the inserted pluggable module is of correct modify the MODULETYPE value.
type by the service record but the
MODULETYPE attribute is not correct,
the inserted pluggable module is of the remove the module and insert one that matches
incorrect type, the expected module type. NOTE: The
pluggable module in LD cards cannot be
replaced without removing the host cards.
the inserted pluggable module is of the correct remove the module and reseat it back into the
type, card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-251
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MISMATCH (Pluggable Module Mismatch)
MISMATCHMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the pluggable module and replace it with another pluggable module of the same
type. Perform the procedure Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-252 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MIXEDPFUSED (Mixed types of power filters used)
MIXEDPFUSED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIXEDPFUSED
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-253
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MMG (Mismerge)
MMG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MMG
MMG (Mismerge)
The OT port has detected a mismerge at the MEP layer. A MEP detects mismerge when it
receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) but incorrect MEG ID (indicating that frames from a different
service instance are merged with the service instance represented by the MEP's own MEG
ID). Such a condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration, but could also be caused
by a hardware/software failure in the network.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E
This alarm is raised when an MEP receives CCM frames with the correct MEG level, but
an incorrect MEG ID. The alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames
with the correct MEG ID.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MAID (MD name and MA Name). The local MAID and remote peer
MAID should be same.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-254 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
MOD Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MOD
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-255
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MOD (Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID
MOD Insertion)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the MOD condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-256 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MODOUTOOR (Modulator output power out of range)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MODOUTOOR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for an MODOUTOOR against the OT port. At
the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the port is pluggable module, remove and reinsert the same module. If the alarm does
not clear, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-257
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch)
MSIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MSIM
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 43STX4P
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve all the alarms reported at OT port. Check if there is a signal degraded alarm
reported, such as DEGOTU. Perform the corrective action for clearing the alarms found.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 After all signal degraded alarms are cleared, retrieve the Digital Wrapper (DW)
performance monitoring group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Check whether uncorrectable FEC bit errors are reported. If so, perform the action for
clearing the signal degraded alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-258 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MSIM (Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch)
MSIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After all signal degraded alarms are cleared and no uncorrectable bit errors are reported,
check whether the input OTU signal MSI byte is compliant with the received OT card
settings. (The source and destination OTU are generally of the same OTU type.)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-259
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MTCESURV (Add power control failure)
MTCESURV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURV
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43STX4, 4DPA4,
MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the card is a transponder card that is equipped check to see that the fibering for that card is
with a Wavelength Tracker encoder, correct. Remove the fiber from the Tx port on
the transponder card. If the condition clears
after 20 seconds, then this is a misfibering
problem.
the card is an SVAC, or if there is no fibering continue with Step 3.
problem on the transponder card,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Confirm that replacement card supports the same band as the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed card and cap the ends to protect them from dirt and
damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once the software on the card is successfully upgraded (this happens automatically), the
alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-261
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode
MTCESURVDGR degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCESURVDGR
Corrective Action
The OT or SVAC card has detected a DSP failure and this means that the wavelength
tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during steady state operation,
there is a high probability that the services carried by this OT or SVAC are unaffected. To
clear this alarm, replace the card. The card replacement procedure is service affecting and
should be conducted during a maintenance window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that replacement OT or SVAC card supports the same band as the alarmed OT or
SVAC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed OT or SVAC card and cap the ends to protect them
from dirt and damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-262 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures MTCESURVDGR (Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode
MTCESURVDGR degrade)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Once the software on the OT or SVAC card is successfully upgraded (this happens
automatically), the alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-263
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NET (Link Down; Data Link Down)
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the NET condition to the associated card and port upstream. Verify
that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state is Up,
then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card's client receive port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-264 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NET (Link Down; Data Link Down)
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the NET condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a warm reset on the card where the NET condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the other end is plugged into a matching ethernet source (if this is an ALPHG
port, the matching source is another ALPHG port).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that cable/fibre is the correct type for the Ethernet port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If a cable/fibre tester is available check that the cable/fibre is correct, otherwise try
another cable/fibre.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-266 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NET (Link Down; Data Link Down)
NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card with the faulty Ethernet port. Refer to Replacing System Components
(p. 3-51).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-267
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NOTALLOWED (Card not allowed)
NOTALLOWED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTALLOWED
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability All cards
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify that the Wavelength Tracker mode of the shelf is set correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-268 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP
NTPOOSYNC server is reachable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NTPOOSYNC
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify provisioned servers are valid and reachable. If not, consult network engineering for
correct server addresses.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC
condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-269
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures NTPOOSYNC (Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP
NTPOOSYNC server is reachable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC
condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC condition. Follow the
return and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-270 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH (OA pump laser bias current high)
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B,
MESH4, RA2P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
1 If another card failure is reported on the card, follow the procedure for that specific alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-271
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OAPUMPTEMPHIGH (OA pump laser temperature high)
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAPUMPTEMPHIGH
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B,
MESH4, RA2P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for an OAPUMPTEMPHIGH against the LD
pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure, High Temperature Troubleshooting (p. 3-28).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-272 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8, CWR888A, MESH4, OPS, WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify whether the expected power for the channels at the port reporting the collision are
set.
CLI Check if the expected power is set for the channel. Type:
config interface shelf/slot/port wavekey in | out
frequency detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-273
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the affect port. Click the Wave Keys In or
Wave Keys Out tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-274 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION (Channel collision)
OCHCOLLISION
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
show condition
config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
WEBUI 1. Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
2. Select Reports > Condition List.
3. Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-275
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The trouble point for the alarm is directly upstream of the alarmed point. Retrieve a list of
active alarms on the NE and resolve issues/alarms at the trouble point. Of particular
interest are card or wavelength tracker failures.
CLI alm
show condition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-276 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHCOLLISION-OUT (Channel collision Output Direction)
OCHCOLLISION-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the physical fiber topology in the upstream direction from the alarmed port to
the ingress point into the NE matches the configured topology. Caution A changing the
physical fiber topology of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services. It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing
the physical fiber topology of the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Observe on the downstream NE if this is the only card reporting the collision. If so, warm
reset the only alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-277
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHFDI
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHFDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-278 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHFDI (Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication)
OCHFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoint of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the LD pack. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OT or SVAC
port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-279
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHPDI
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12,
43STA1P, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4P, 4DPA4,
MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Cleaning the fiber connector of the NE may be service impacting if the fiber is currently
carrying services.
It is recommended to wait for a maintenance window before changing the physical fiber
topology of the NE.
If the OCHPDI condition is exists on a NE for longer than 5 minutes, this means that the
wavelength cannot reach the required target power. This may impact the service in terms
of potential signal quality. In this case, perform the following procedure.
At the end of each step wait to see if the condition clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location and specifications of the condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-280 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHPDI (Channel Payload Defect Indicator)
OCHPDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the listing of cross connects on the NE and determine the service launch points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the NEs identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show the path power trace on the two endpoints of the wavelength service. Determine if
the wavelength has achieved the target output power from the transponder. Enter the
following commands on both end points to determine if the launch power has been
achieved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the transponder can provide the required power. If the transponder can
provide enough power, clean fiber connectors from the transponder to the OMD or
CWR8 port to ensure the connections are clean.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-281
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)
OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYDUP
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
The alarm lists the IP address and shelf/slot/port for the other NE sourcing the same OCH
trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if there are any existing communication-related alarms and troubleshoot them first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-282 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHKEYDUP (Duplicate Wave Key)
OCHKEYDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Search the list for the OCh trail in question and record the A-end, Z-end, band and
channel for that connection (you will use this in Step 6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-283
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHKEYOVERLAP (Wave Key overlap)
OCHKEYOVERLAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHKEYOVERLAP
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the endpoints of the
service for the particular alarmed channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 List the cross connects that currently exist on the endpoint NEs and identify the cross
connects involved with the alarmed power trace.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config xc <a-end shelf slot port> <z-end shelf slot port>
band channel rekey
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-284 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCH Trail name)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-285
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILDUP (Duplicate OCh trail name)
OCHTRAILDUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
The alarm will list the IP address and shelf, slot, port for the other NE sourcing the same
OCh Trail name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that there is a NE with the IP address that is alledgedly sourcing the duplicate
OCh Trail. If the IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed then this alarm
resolves itself within one hour.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Step 1 did not resolve the problem, then choose which connection should have a new
name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate the connection (across the network) for the path. This involves deleting that trail
and recreating it with a different name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-286 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Record the exact name used to identify the OCh trail.List the cross connects that currently
exist on-NE:
Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Record the exact name used for the OCh trail
(wreache spaces and case are relevant for a match).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the OCh trail name as specified on this NE exactly matches the OCh trail
name as specified on the head NE.List the cross connects that currently exist in the
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-287
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHTRAILUNKNOWN (Unknown OCH Trail for x-connect)
OCHTRAILUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Search the list for the OCh trail in question. Compare any names for the exact name
recorded in the Step 1.
If... Then...
the name is misspelled, recreate the appropriate connection with the
appropriate name.
there is no match, continue with Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the head end NE. Log into the head end NE.
Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any outstanding alarms on the head-end
NE CN links.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the OCh trail's head NE cross-connect has been created. Log into the head end
NE for that connection. List the cross-connects that currently exist on this head-end NE:
CLI show xc brief
WEBUI Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
a match is not found, create the add connection.
a match is found, continue with Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that there is CN/OSPF connectivity at the NE raising the condition. Log into the
NE raising the condition. Check for alarms on any ALPHG links. Resolve any
outstanding alarms on the NE CN links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-288 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-289
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and proceed to the troubleshooting procedure for
the LOS (Channel absent) alarm is present, that alarm.
any amplifier alarms exist on the local NE or clear the alarms.
any upstream NE (check for LOS or OPR type
alarms),
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms. Resolve the
channel absent alarms first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-290 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8, OSCT
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check to ensure that service provisioning is complete for the channel in question.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the fiber feeding the detect point is correctly configured in the NE's topology
table and that the physical connection is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fiber is external to the NE, ensure that it is the correct one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
other Wavelength Tracker alarms exist on the clear the alarms.
same channel on this or any upstream NE,
the unexpected channel has been launched and clear the alarm.
the Channel absent alarm is present,
any amplifier alarms exist on the NE or any clear the alarms.
upstream NE,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-291
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCHUNKNOWN-OUT (Channel Unexpected)
OCHUNKNOWN-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A connected fiber may have resulted in the local channel unexpected and the other
channel missing alarms. Examine the network for any channel absent alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-292 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCI (Open Connection Indication - ODU)
OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCI
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1,
43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCI condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
11STAR1 client port to clear the OCI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-293
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OCIEGR (Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU)
OCIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCIEGR
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCIEGR condition declared
on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
the affected client port to clear the OCI condition.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-294 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4, MESH4, SVAC, WR
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this service has no transponders, troubleshoot the equipment that is connected to the
OT or SVAC card's input port to determine and resolve any issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the OT or SVAC card where the
alarm is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-295
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR (Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
OPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 6.
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 4.
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-296 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range Loss Too High
between DCM Ports of LD)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSHIGH
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a lightpath trace to check the upstream power levels, checking that the expected
powers are met. Clean fiber connections if necessary and check that fibers are not kinked
or pinched.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for any other existing power-related alarms at the amplifier card, and troubleshoot
them first.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-297
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSHIGH (Out of Operational Range Loss Too High
OPRLOSSHIGH between DCM Ports of LD)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the optical power levels at the DCM port of the amplifier card where the alarm is
raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-298 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRLOSSLOW
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2325B,
ALPFGT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a lightpath trace to check the upstream power levels, making sure that the
expected powers are met. Clean fiber connections if necessary and make sure fibers are
not kinked or pinched.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check if there are any other existing power-related alarms at the amplifier card, and
troubleshoot them first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the optical power levels at the DCM port of the amplifier card where the alarm is
raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-299
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRLOSSLOW (Out of Operational Range - Loss Too Low)
OPRLOSSLOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-300 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRHIGH High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRHIGH
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-301
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRHIGH (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRHIGH High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 3.
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-302 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRLOW Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRPWRLOW
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, ALPFGT, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the optical power levels at the LINE or SIG port of the LD card where the alarm
is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-303
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRPWRLOW (Out of Operational Range - Input Power Too
OPRPWRLOW Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 3.
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the LINE or SIG port of the amplifier
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-304 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPROOR (Optical power received out of range)
OPROOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPROOR
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1
This procedure details the corrective action for an OPROOR against the OT port. At the
end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If input power level is lower or higher than the required on the port, identify the
associated OCh trail and verify the power levels along the OCh trail. If power levels
along the upstream OCh trail are outside of their targeted range, then troubleshoot the port
before continuing. If any power deviations raise additional alarms, troubleshoot them
first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects OPROOR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-305
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPROOR (Optical power received out of range)
OPROOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Clean the input port of the OT. If the port is pluggable module, replace the module.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-306 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPR-OUT (Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range)
OPR-OUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-OUT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR8
Corrective Action
Refer to OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable) (p. 2-308).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-307
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRTX
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, OPS, OSCT, CWR8,
MVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to determine the power levels
upstream of the alarmed card. Troubleshoot, isolate and identify other alarms or
conditions that would cause the OPR alarm to be raised. Using the appropriate corrective
actions resolve these issues first.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-308 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify, isolate and troubleshoot any upstream alarms or conditions that would cause the
OPR alarm to be raised. Use the appropriate corrective actions to resolve these issues
before continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the card where the alarm is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable the problem may be with the card itself.
limits, Proceed to Step 8.
the power levels are not within acceptable continue with Step 5.
limits,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Thoroughly clean the fiber jumper connected to the receive port of the OT or SVAC card
raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Thoroughly clean the fiber bulkhead connector of the receive port of the OT or SVAC
card raising the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify that the fiber type upstream of the OT or SVAC card matches the provisioned type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-309
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRTX (Channel Power Unstable)
OPRTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-310 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPRUNACHIEVE
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12E,
11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
This procedure is service affecting and should be conducted during a maintenance
window.
Note: If an OPSA pack is topologically connected between the transponder (OT) and
the encoder port (MVAC or SVAC), then the troubleshooting steps referring to
cleaning and verifying fiber connections should be applied to OPSA ports Sig In and
A Out, B Out as well.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the transponder line port that is connected to OT VA port, MVAC port, or
SVAC port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-311
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This indicates the expected power, actual power, and what each OT or SVAC port is
connected to.
If the optical line to which the alarmed interface connects is Manual power managed,
enter (CLI) show powermgmt ingress sh/sl/[Line|Lineout]
If the Power Management Type is Manual, verify that the output power target set for the
encoder interface is consistent with the output power required by the Engineering
Planning Tool plan for the network. If necessary correct the target output power for the
interface and wait 5 minutes to see if the alarm clears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the fiber connecting the transponder (OT) line port and OT VA, MVAC
or SVAC port. Check that the fiber is not being pinched or bent tightly. Ensure that the
fiber connectors are properly seated at the OT line out port or SVAC In, MVAC In, VA In
port, and any bulkhead connectors (if any) between them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using an optical power meter, measure the optical output power of the transponder to
ensure that the output power is within specification. Make this measurement as close as
possible to the output port of the transponder.
If... Then...
the output power is within the acceptable continue with Step 5.
limits,
the output power is not within acceptable the transponder port may be dirty. Clean and
limits, inspect port, and measure the optical output
power of the transponder. Continue with Step
4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the output power is with acceptable limits, clean and reconnect the transponder and OT
or SVAC and check the alarm status of the shelf. If the output power remains below
specification:
1. Reseat the transponder card. Refer to Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
2. Measure the optical output power of the transponder. If the output power remains
below specification, Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components
(p. 3-51). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support
guide to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-312 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. If the source transponder for the signal is outside the 1830 PSS (alien channel
transport case) replace the source transponder.
4. If the source optical interface is a replaceable pluggable optical module, replace the
SFP or XFP module (see Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57) or Replacing an XFP
Module (p. 3-60)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the encoder is an OT (VA, SVAC or MVAC) port, using an optical power meter,
measure the optical power being received.
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder continue with Step 7.
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is reasonable,
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean, inspect and connect the fiber between
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is higher than the transponder and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC
expected, port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Re-measure the optical power being received at the OT VA, SVAC or MVAC In port.
If... Then...
the loss over the fiber between the transponder clean and reconnect the transponder and OT
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is reasonable, VA/SVAC/MVAC port and check the alarm
status of the shelf.
the loss over the fiber between the transponder replace the fiber.
and OT VA/SVAC/MVAC port is higher than
expected,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the OT VA, SVAC or MVAC In port. Clean and reconnect the fiber between the
transponder and OT VA, SVAC or MVAC port. Check the alarm status of the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Measure the optical power being received at the OT VA, SVAC, or MVAC input port to
confirm power is present. If the alarm has not cleared, replace the OT VA port SFP
EVOA, MVAC port SFP EVOA, or SVAC card. Refer to Replacing System
Components (p. 3-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-313
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPRUNACHIEVE (Channel Power Unachievable)
OPRUNACHIEVE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the encoder is directly the line port of the OT:
1. Attempt a warm reset of the pack and wait to see if the problem clears.
CLI: config card card type shelf slot reset warm
WebUI: Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
2. Attempt a cold reset of the pack and wait to see if the problem clears.
CLI: config card card type shelf slot reset cold
WebUI: Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
3. Replace the OT card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-314 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPTINTBASE (Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed)
OPTINTBASE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTBASE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Only a user with administrative-level privileges can perform this procedure.
In the WebUI, select the affected card in the Equipment Tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Baseline Span Loss field, select a valid value (dB), and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-315
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPTINTDET (Optical Intrusion Detected)
OPTINTDET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTDET
Severity MJ
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Only a user with administrative-level privileges can perform this procedure.
In the WebUI, select the affected card in the Equipment Tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Clear Optical Intrusion Detected Alarm field, and click Submit.
If the span loss has substantially changed, the span loss baseline will need to be adjusted
accordingly (see Step 3).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-316 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OPTINTSUSP (Optical Intrusion Monitoring Suspended)
OPTINTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPTINTSUSP
Severity MJ
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-317
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures OSCSSF (Server Signal Failure - OSC)
OSCSSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSCSSF
Severity NR
Service affecting? No
Applicability ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see LD Input LOS (p. 2-201)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-318 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PCSGENERATOR (PCS Generator active)
PCSGENERATOR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCSGENERATOR
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SNA1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
CLI config interface card_type shelf slot
c1 loopback testsignal disabled
WEBUI Select the card. On the Port Loopback Control window, deselect (uncheck)
the Test Signal Loopback Enabled field.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-319
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a PLM condition on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the far-end peer of the local OT port where the PLM condition exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the service configuration document to determine which signal type and/or mapping
mode is expected to be configured on the ODUkP segment that has PLM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify signal type and/or mapping mode to match the service configuration document
(and match on both ends of the segment).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the source of one end of the ODUkP segment is in another operators network (this
would be the case if there is an OTM-0.2 hand off between 1830 PSS network domain
and client OTN network) contact the operator and resolve the mismatch in setting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-320 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PLMEGR (Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLMEGR
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a PLMEGR condition on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the far-end peer of the local OT port where the PLM condition exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the service configuration document to determine which signal type and/or mapping
mode is expected to be configured on the ODUkP segment that has PLM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify signal type and/or mapping mode to match the service configuration document
(and match on both ends of the segment).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the source of one end of the ODUkP segment is in another operators network (this
would be the case if there is an OTM-0.2 hand off between the 1830 PSS network domain
and the client OT network) contact the operator and resolve the mismatch in setting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-321
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR
PRCDRERR
This section includes procedures for the following alarms:
PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id)
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology)
PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-322 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR (Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf id)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SHELF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Review the shelf serial numbers that are assigned to the subtended shelves by displaying
the shelf list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-323
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Invalid topology)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability COM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the cross-connects on the NE, and look for cross-connects that do not conform
to the rules. These cross-connects are considered invalid.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the invalid connections. Any service that is running over an invalid cross-connect
that is deleted is interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-324 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, AHPLG, AHPHG,
ALPHG, ALPFGT, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that all internal and external fibers are connected correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that there are no topological connections between lines with different types
(Manual or Auto).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If there is an AnyDir1 A/D block in the node, ensure that the network topology for the add
direction is correct and that it is set to Auto Power Management. If power management is
Manual, then the alarm will be raised against each topologically connected Line Out or
LINEOUT port in the connection block when the optical line in the connection block is
set to Auto.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-325
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO (Power management topology invalid)
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select Administration > Power Commissioning > Power Adjustment >
Add/Drop. Select the WR8-88A card and side.
From the Equipment Tree select the card > Power Management tab and
check that the settings are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there is an AnyDir1 A/D block, make sure the connection block has Auto Power
Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check that the topologically connected fibers are set to Auto Power Management.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-326 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO-OUT
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO-OUT
An invalid power management topology has been detected in the drop direction of an
anydir1 A/D block. This alarm will be raised at the top WR8-88A Sig port.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, AHPLG, AHPHG,
ALPHG, ALPFGT, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Confirm that the network topology in the drop direction of the A/D block is correct and
that there are no topological connections between lines with different power management
types
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the A/D block and connection block are set to Auto Power Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If there is an AnyDir1 A/D block, make sure the connection block has Auto Power
Management.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-327
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO-OUT
PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that the topologically connected fibers are set to Auto Power Management.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-328 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWR
PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWR
PWR
This section includes procedures for the following alarms:
PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low)
PWR (Power Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-329
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power
PWR Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PF
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
If... Then...
the EC reports that a particular PF is faulted, replace the PF.
NOTE: If you do not have a redundant power
filter configuration, this step will be service
affecting.
the EC does report that a particular PF is continue with Step 3.
faulted,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset warm
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-330 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWR (Power Filter 1 breaker off or voltage low) PWR (Power
PWR Filter 2 breaker off or voltage low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-331
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJCOMMS (Inter NE communication timeout blocking
PWRADJCOMMS power adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJCOMMS
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-332 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJCOMMS (Inter NE communication timeout blocking
PWRADJCOMMS power adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the upstream NE is undergoing discovery by an NMS system, wait for the NMS to
finish discovery.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the upstream NE is functioning as it should. Ensure that there is CN/OSPF
connectivity at the NE raising the alarm by checking any other alarms on the NE CN
links. Check that the OSC channel is operational.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-333
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJCOMMS (Inter NE communication timeout blocking
PWRADJCOMMS power adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the ingress adjustment fails, troubleshoot why it failed using the Adjust Result and go
to the troubleshooting steps for the PWRADJFAIL alarm.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-334 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL
The corrective action depends on the adjustment status that can be found at:
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSC, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-335
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Aborted)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Aborted)
The PWRADJFAIL (Aborted) alarm is raised when the adjustment was aborted. SCOT
will abort the local ingress gain adjustment if the auto gain adjustment enabling makes a
True to False transition while the adjustment is in progress.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-336 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that Location)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 This should not occur because the ASE Ingress or Egress Adjust is invoked by the NMS.
Choose a valid adjustment point and rerun adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-337
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - Cross
PWRADJFAIL Connect Provisioned)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-338 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition
PWRADJFAIL Active)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-339
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum
PWRADJFAIL Planned Gain); PWRADJFAIL (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds
Maximum Planned Gain)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the span loss is too high, clean the fiber connections between the patch panel and LD
Line In at the local line for an ingress LD or within the node for an egress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and LD Line Out at the upstream line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that the loss of the fiber span is within the designed limits (see Step 1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-340 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum
PWRADJFAIL Planned Gain); PWRADJFAIL (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds
Maximum Planned Gain)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-341
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if there are any alarms indicating an amplifier hardware problem. Replace the
alarmed amplifier if appropriate.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check if there are any other alarms on the local node such as a card missing (a missing
add path control card such as an SVAC, MVAC or OPS could cause this result).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check if the span loss is too high and clean the fiber connections if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the number of provisioned services is less than or equal to the planned number
of services for this part of the network by counting the number of services that run
through the line in question. If the expected powers are user defined, then make sure the
expected power per channel reflects the channel count.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-342 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-343
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a power meter, measure the loss between the DCM To to DCM From port. If no
DCM is connected, then there should be a 10+/-2 dB attenuation connected across the
ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-344 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level Unavailable)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the local node alarm log to discover if there is a problem with the ingress
amplifier. Troubleshoot any alarms that are found before continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-345
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level Unavailable)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-346 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On External -
PWRADJFAIL Raman Amplifier Span)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this line was planned with an external Raman amplifier then proceed to use in-service
adjustments to adjust this lines ingress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If this line was not planned with an external Raman amplifier (RA3P), ensure the IP
address field for the external Raman amplifier is not populated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-347
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Card Required for Adjust Not Present)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Once the REPLUNITMISS alarm has been cleared, verify that all required through path
cards are installed in the node with the Admin Status Up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If all cards are present there may be a hardware problem with the missing card. Replace
the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-348 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Configuration Request Unsuccessful)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for alarms on the local node and upstream node. Troubleshoot them before
continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Attempt an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-349
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Communication Timeout with Upstream Node)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The NEs connect to the control network through the alarm panel DCN interface. Verify
that the DCN is working properly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-350 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Error)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Error)
The PWRADJFAIL (Error) alarm is raised when an internal error has occurred.
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if there are any other alarms raised and troubleshoot them before continuing with
this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the software release on the node is the correct release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that all cards in the node are running the correct release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-351
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Error)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-352 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Fiber is Not Yet Commissioned)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-353
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (In Progress)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the current adjustment to finish and then initiate another.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-354 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-355
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean connections between cards and make sure the fiber patch cables arent being bent
sharply or pinched to try to reduce the loss.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If... Then...
the alarm is raised during an ingress check the loss between:
adjustment, the patch panel and OSC WDM In
OSC WDM In and ingress Amp In
the previous node output to current node
ingress LD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-356 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the alarm is raised during an egress check the loss between:
adjustment, the ingress LD and egress point
a WSS that is mesh connected to another
WSS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check if there are any other alarms being raised that would indicate that power
management on the NE is not optimized and/or error-free.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the loss remains too high, replace the cards. Refer to Replacing System Components
(p. 3-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Step 5.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-357
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted)
The PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted) alarm is raised when SCOT interrupted an adjustment
that was in progress.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-358 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use a lightpath trace to find the source of loss too low. Focus on the loss at the ingress
checkpoint (between the previous node output to the current node ingress) and at the
egress checkpoint (between the ingress amplifier and egress point).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check if there are any other alarms being raised that would indicate that power
management on the NE is not optimized and/or error-free.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Re-fiber components if required (failure may be caused by loss too low through the
ingress components if misfibered).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-359
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the channel powers are missing at the output port the Loss Too Low condition may be raised.
of the ingress amplifier (LINEOUT or LINE port Continue with Step 6.
depending on amplifier type),
channel powers are missing, it may be necessary to temporarily increase
the minimum gain value for the amplifier
or reduce the span loss enough to return the
output to the normal operating range.
Proceed to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check if channel powers are missing at the LD output LINE or LINEOUT in the receive
direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem persists then replace cards in the path where the loss is too low. Refer to
Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-360 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-361
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local node alarm log to discover if there is a problem with the ingress/egress
amplifier. Troubleshoot any alarms that are found before continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-362 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds Maximum
PWRADJFAIL Planned Gain); PWRADJFAIL (MESH4 OA Required Gain is
Less Than Minimum Planned Gain)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for excess loss between the ingress adjustment point (output of the ingress line
receive LD) to the MESH4 Sig In port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean fiber jumper cable connectors on the path from the ingress adjustment point to the
MESH4 Sig In port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-363
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path
PWRADJFAIL Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the node for loss problems in the add path that could cause the add path FGOAM
to shut off or other loss problems that cause channel powers to be too low at the egress
adjustment point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-364 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for
PWRADJFAIL Adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a lightpath trace to confirm that services are present at the adjustment point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the power levels at the adjustment point to verify if the powers are stable within
0.5 dB, by refreshing the lightpath trace periodically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If power levels are not visibly stable, wait for 5 minutes for the powers to stabilize.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If power levels are still not visibly stable, then trace upstream to find the root cause of the
power instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-365
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for
PWRADJFAIL Adjustment at MESH4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a lightpath trace to confirm that services are present at the adjustment point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the power levels at the adjustment point (output of the ingress line receive LD) to
verify if the powers are stable within 0.5 dB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If power levels are still not visibly stable, then trace upstream to find the root cause of the
power instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-366 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Services Present)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use a lightpath trace to confirm that services are present at the adjustment point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If services are missing upstream of the local node, troubleshoot upstream problems first
before returning to the local node
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the power levels at the adjustment point (normally external Line Out) are at
the expected levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If line is WTOCM monitored, check for any problems with the WTOCM pack. Note
whether the channels are WT reliable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-367
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Services Provisioned)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If services are provisioned, then this is a software error. Check alarms for any software
related errors and troubleshoot them before continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-368 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path
PWRADJFAIL Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the WT measured optical powers of the add path channels on the NE with this
failure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the power levels at the adjustment point to verify if the powers are stable within
0.5 dB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If power levels are not visibly stable, then trace upstream to find the root cause of the
power instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-369
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for
PWRADJFAIL adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If... Then...
the adjustment is an ingress adjustment verify total power is reported at the upstream
line's LINE Out or LINEOUT port (depending
on LD type), and at the downstream NE RA2P
output (if equipped) and ingress LD SIG Out
or LINEOUT port (depending on LD type).
Troubleshoot the reason total power is missing
before returning to this procedure. Re-run an
ingress adjustment after troubleshooting.
the adjustment is an egress adjustment verify total power is reported at the egress line
LD LINE Out or LINEOUT port (depending
on LD type). Troubleshoot the reason total
power is missing before returning to this
procedure. Re-run an egress adjustment after
troubleshooting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-370 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for
PWRADJFAIL adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to view the power levels of the optical channels
in transmission at the point where the condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the port for which the PWRADJFAIL is raised is monitored by a WTOCM pack, verify
the WTOCM pack is correctly installed, and detecting channels expected at the monitored
port. Troubleshoot any WTOCM issues present, wait one minute, then re-run the
adjustment.
CLI show interface wtocm sh/sl/In {1-4}
WEBUI From Equipment Tree select the WTOCM card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify by visual inspection that fiber connections between the pack ports of the optical
line adjusted. For an ingress adjustment verify the NE's upstream neighbor optical line
optical connection are correctly mated. Mate properly if necessary, wait for one minute,
then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify by visual inspection that the fiber patch cables between ports are not damaged. If
any are damaged replace the cables at earliest maintenance window.
Caution: Replacing fiber patch cables is service affecting.
Wait until APR conditions clear, then wait for one minute, then re-run the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify by field inspection that there are no defects in the fiber plant between an upstream
and downstream NE that could be causing reflections. This step is only applicable to an
ingress adjustment. Make any repairs to the fiber plant required. Wait until APR
conditions clear, then wait for one minute, then re-run the adjustment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-371
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No through services in appropriate state for
PWRADJFAIL adjustment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If power levels remain unstable at a port, and the problem can be localized to one pack,
perform a warm reset of a pack. After the reset completes, wait for one minute, the re-run
the adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If power levels remain unstable at a port, and the problem can be localized to one pack,
perform a cold reset of a pack.
After the reset completes, wait for APR to clear, wait for one minute, the re-run the
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 If power levels remain unstable at a port, and the problem can be localized to one pack,
follow the procedure for replacing a pack. Refer to Replacing System Components
(p. 3-51). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement. Re-run the
adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-372 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If no through services are required on the path then this message can be safely ignored.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-373
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If... Then...
the system is equipped with the continue with Step 2.
SFD40/SFD40B,
the system is not equipped with the proceed to Step 6.
SFD40/SFD40B,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-374 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List >Total.
3 If the SFD40/SFD40B has been initialized, and has a temperature alarm, delete all the
optical channel services and turn off OTU lasers connected to SFD40/SFD40B.
To delete optical channel services:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When the temperature alarm is cleared, re-provision the optical channel service and
continue with Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the reason for the failure at the ingress LD card that has raised the PWRADJFAIL
alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-375
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If there is a lack of communication to the upstream NE, resolve the communication issue
prior to resolving the PWRADJFAIL alarm. Ensure the NE with the PWRADJFAIL alarm
can communicate with the upstream NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Retrieve the optical power levels at the receive port of the LD card where the alarm is
raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
If... Then...
the power levels are within the acceptable perform a power adjust operation at the ingress
limits, Amplifier card or the ALPHG card that has
raised the PWRADJFAIL alarm (continue
withStep 10).
the power levels are not within the acceptable check for kinking of the fiber at various points
limits, upstream of the receive connector on the
alarmed card. Proceed to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Using the standard optical fiber jumper cleaning procedure, clean the fiber and measure
the power again. Clean the receive bulkhead connector on the card. If the cleaning/fiber
un-kinking resolves the power levels to the acceptable limits, then go back to Step 9.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-376 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. Any
deviation from the specifications, as a result of work done on the span, may require new
network parameters and /or a rebalancing of the network to compensate. Follow the
appropriate procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to validate the new
parameters of the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to determine other possible causes of the
PWRADJFAIL alarm. Troubleshoot any errors found before continuing with this
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Perform a warm reset on the card where the PWRADJFAIL alarm is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow
the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the
faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-377
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If no through services are required on the path then this message can be safely ignored.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-378 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Power Measurement is Unavailable)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The total power level of the ingress amplifier at Line Out may be too low. Perform a
lightpath trace to check if power levels agree with the expected value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber connectors at the Line Out port of the amplifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform an adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-379
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); PWRADJFAIL (Raman
PWRADJFAIL Gain Too Low)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the reported gain is consistent with the loss report and the gain of the ingress
LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the Raman gain is still too high, increase the value of ept_Raman_Gmax_Expected and
contact the Alcatel-Lucent field support services since this action may impair the
network.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-380 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Unstable)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify there are no alarms present that could indicate a power stability problem in the
network. Troubleshoot any alarms found before continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the problem persists, troubleshoot the connection from the RA2P Line In to the fiber
plant of the span.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-381
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Some Add Path Control Points Incomplete)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the locally added channels add path control ports have an Admin Status set to
Up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-382 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a lightpath trace to check if there are losses higher than planned. Clean or replace
components as needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the current splice margin at the ingress LD Sig Out or Line Out port. Change the
splice margin to a value that will encompass the deviation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-383
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Timeout)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAIL (Timeout)
The PWRADJFAIL (Timeout) alarm is raised when an operation took longer to complete
than allowed.
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for alarms on the local node and upstream node. Troubleshoot them before
continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-384 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Topology Provisioning is Incomplete)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the through path topology contains the expected set of cards. Check each port
that is configured to carry traffic has the correct topology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 an ingress/egress adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-385
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Data Unavailable)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify there are no alarms on the upstream node. Troubleshoot any alarms present before
continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the problem persists, verify that all through path cards are installed in the upstream
node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-386 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the software release of the upstream node and upgrade if necessary. When software
upgrade is in progress, the alarm SWFTDWN will be raised. (For more details on
software upgrades, see of To Replace a Simplex Equipment Controller Using CLI
(p. 3-76).)
The release directory would be combined with the software server root parameter value to
make the path on the Remote File Server where the software release resides. See also the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16)
3.6.50 Installation and System Turn-up Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-387
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible)
PWRADJFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-388 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted)
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAILADD
PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted)
The PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted) alarm is raised when the adjustment was aborted.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-389
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition
PWRADJFAILADD Active)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-390 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a power meter, measure the loss between the DCM To to DCM From port. If no
DCM is connected, then there should be a 10+/-2 dB attenuation connected across the
ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-391
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Card Required for Adjustment Not
PWRADJFAILADD Present)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Once the REPLUNITMISS alarm has been cleared, verify that all required cards required
for the adjustment are installed in the node with admin state up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If all cards are present there may be a hardware problem with the missing card. Replace
the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Attempt an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-392 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress);
PWRADJFAILADD PWRADJFAILADD (In Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-393
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High)
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to check loss between the output port of the
A/D add LD and the Sig In port of the top WR8-88A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the connections between cards and make sure that the fibers are connected
correctly and are not kinked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check if there are any other power management related alarms raised in the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-394 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached)
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local node alarm log to discover if there is a problem with the ingress/egress
amplifier. Troubleshoot any alarms that are found.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-395
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds
PWRADJFAILADD Maximum Planned Gain); PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA
Required Gain is Less Than Minimum Planned Gain)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the loss between WR8-88A and the MESH4 is too high, clean or replace fiber jumpers
as needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-396 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned)
PWRADJFAILADD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If services are provisioned, then this alarm is a software error. Check alarms for any
software related errors and troubleshoot them before continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-397
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR
PWRADJFAILADD Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for loss problems or disconnected fibers of add channels at the CLS inputs to the
CWR card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-398 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path
PWRADJFAILADD Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for loss problems or disconnected fibers on the add path preceding the pack whose
AID is provided in the message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-399
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path
PWRADJFAILADD Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to confirm that services are present at the target
point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Refresh the lightpath trace periodically to check if power levels at the target point to
verify if powers are stable within 0.5 dB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If power levels are not visibly stable, then wait 5 minutes to see if optical power control
run by other parts of the network will stabilize the channels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If power levels are still not stable, then trace upstream to find the root cause of the power
instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If there is a WTOCM pack connected, then check that it is correctly installed and is
detecting reliable channels. If any alarms are raised here, then troubleshoot those before
continuing these steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-400 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path
PWRADJFAILADD Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-401
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition
PWRADJFAILDRP Active)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJFAILDRP
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-402 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)
PWRADJFAILDRP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the loss between the DCM To to DCM From port. If no DCM is connected, then
there should be a 10+/-2 dB attenuation connected across the ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-403
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (Card Required for Adjustment Not
PWRADJFAILDRP Present)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Once the REPLUNITMISS alarm has been cleared, verify that all required cards required
for the adjustment are installed in the node with admin state up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If all cards are present there may be a hardware problem with the missing card. Replace
the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Attempt an adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-404 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress);
PWRADJFAILDRP PWRADJFAILDRP (In Progress)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-405
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High)
PWRADJFAILDRP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to check loss between the output port of the
A/D add LD and the Sig In port of the middle WR8-88A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the connections between cards and make sure that the fibers are connected
correctly and are not kinked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check if there are any other power management related alarms raised in the node and
upstream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-406 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned)
PWRADJFAILDRP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If services are provisioned, then this is a software error. Check alarms for any software
related errors and troubleshoot them before continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-407
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path
PWRADJFAILDRP Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If an LOS condition is present, then troubleshoot that alarm before continuing with this
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the AID is for the adjustment point, check for loss problems or disconnected fibers
on the drop path preceding the adjustment
point.
the AID is for a pack that follows the check for loss problems or disconnected fibers
adjustment point, at the input to the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-408 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path
PWRADJFAILDRP Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to confirm that services are present at the target
point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check power levels at the target point to verify if powers are stable within 0.5 dB by
periodically refreshing the lightpath trace data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If power levels are not visibly stable, then wait 5 minutes to see if optical power control
run by other parts of the network will stabilize the channels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If power levels are still not stable, then trace upstream to find the root cause of the power
instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If there is a WTOCM pack connected, then check that it is correctly installed and is
detecting reliable channels. If any alarms are raised here, then troubleshoot them before
continuing with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-409
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path
PWRADJFAILDRP Optimization)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-410 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)
PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRADJREQ
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2017B, AM2325B,
OSC, OSCT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-411
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRADJREQ (Power Adjust Required)
PWRADJREQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power adjust operation at the ingress amplifier card or the ALPHG card that
has raised the PWRADJREQ alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the adjustment is successful, the PWRADJREQ alarm will be cleared.
Continue with Step 3.
the adjustment fails, the PWRADJFAIL alarm will appear. Proceed
to PWRADJFAIL (p. 2-335).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-412 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded)
PWRMARGIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMARGIN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to determine if there are any anomalies
upstream of the alarmed card that would cause PWRMARGIN condition to be raised.
Look for excessive losses in fiber jumpers or connectors or signal degrade conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber jumper from the point just before the anomaly and clean the fiber and
the bulkhead connector. Insert the fiber back into the bulkhead connector from which it
was removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for the path going upstream until all the excessive losses are
resolved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the fiber length and type used in the span immediately upstream of the
alarmed card still match the original specifications according to the network plan. This
may require a validation by performing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
test from the customer patch panel into the fiber plant. Any anomalies detected at this
stage require external intervention by personnel responsible for the maintenance of the
fiber plant.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-413
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMARGIN (Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded)
PWRMARGIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check if any other alarms have been raised. This alarm may occur with
thePWRADJFAIL alarm depending on the situation. If this alarm is present, troubleshoot
first before proceeding to the next steps. If the PWRMAXGAIN alarm is present,
complete the troubleshooting for that alarm before proceeding with these steps. Make
sure that the power margin is less than or equal to the maximum gain allowed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the path is within all acceptable power ranges, then it is possible that the gain range
provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate the unexpected
change in loss in the network. Capture the current operating state of the network, using
the EMS XML network export feature and refer the problem to network planning for
analysis.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-414 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMAXGAIN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSC, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the span loss preceding the ingress LD LINEIN is less than the planned
maximum loss. If the loss is higher, the PWRADJFAIL alarm will be raised with the
status of Loss too high. If the loss measured is higher than planned, troubleshoot the
PWRADJFAIL alarm first, then return to these steps. This alarm may be raised with the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-415
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRMARGIN alarm as well. Complete these steps before troubleshooting
PWRMARGIN. Ensure that the maximum allowed gain is larger or equal to the power
margin.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the alarm is still active, clean the connections to the fiber span and manually trigger an
ingress adjustment at the alarmed line.
Note: After re-connecting the fiber patch cable, wait for the APR condition on the line
to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If there is a RA2P present, make sure that any alarms raised there are fixed before
continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the RA2P gain is within the planned limits. Pack attributes at the RA2P
LINEIN port report the minimum and maximum expected gain from Raman
amplification. Compare the gain value reported by the gain attribute at the RA2P LINEIN
port to the range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the Raman gain is less than the minimum there may be a point loss problem between
the RA2P LINEIN port and the fiber span. Attempt to locate and repair the point loss
problem, then manually trigger an ingress adjustment at the alarmed line. If the Raman
amplifier gain problem cannot be resolved, do not continue this troubleshooting routine,
and escalate the problem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-416 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Possible other problems include:
Connecting to a fiber type of a different type than the original specifications. This
may require a validation by performing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR) test from the customer patch panel into the fiber plant. Any anomalies
detected at this stage require external intervention by personnel responsible for the
maintenance of the fiber plant.
Incorrect point loss assumptions entered into the Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) at
design time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the line uses an RA2P amplifier and the gain from Raman amplification is within the
planned range, verify that the loss between the RA2P Line Out port and the alarmed
ingress LDs LINEIN port is within the loss range expected for a fiber patch cable. If the
loss is higher than expected attempt to clean the connectors.
Note: After reconnecting the fiber patch cable, wait for the APR condition on the line
to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the fiber connecting the alarmed LD LINEIN port to the RA2P LINEOUT port.
Note: After reconnecting the fiber patch cable, wait for the APR condition on the line
to clear. Reattempt the ingress adjustment for the alarmed line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-417
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRMAXGAIN (Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value)
PWRMAXGAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 If the alarm remains, escalate the problem to those responsible for planning the network.
Network replanning and re-provisioning of power management attributes may be required
before clearing the alarm is possible.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-418 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended);
PWRSUSP PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power management suspended)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRSUSP
OT or SVAC
The measured loss from the input port to the egress LD is different from the theoretical
loss by 4dB or more. The alarm is raised when the power control loop for the card
attempts to change its power (to get the egress LD channel power to the correct value)
and reaches the 4dB clamp.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-419
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP- OT or SVAC - (Power management suspended);
PWRSUSP PWRSUSP- CWR8 (Power management suspended)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWR8
There are two possible causes for the PWRSUSP alarm on a CWR8 channel. In either
case, the CWR8 power control loop stops controlling the attenuation for that channel
(freezes the attenuation).
1. NE power management has told the CWR8 power control loop to clamp the
attenuation for the channel, or the CWR8 power control wants a channel attenuation
that exceeds the clamp. NE power management will do this if:
it is unable to communicate with the upstream node to find out if channels are
leaving it at good power, or absent and;
power is unreliable at measurement source: there is an upstream problem resulting
in the channel leaving an NE the NE with power lower than expected, or the
upstream NE has a wavelength tracker reliability problem at its egress LD.
2. The wavelength tracker measurements for that channel have become unreliable,
which happens when:
SCOT reaches the add power control point limit on a CWR8 or is unable to
correctly adjust channels at the add channels control point
WRSigOutAvg cannot be calculated at the WR Sig Out port on a CWR8 for more
than 10 consecutive add loop iterations and there is at least one add path service
present (if channel reliability is Unreliable at the measurement source)
OPS
PWRSUSP is raised when SCOT uses the OPSA A or B port as the power control port
and if either the required attenuation by SCOT would make the applied attenuation at the
A or B port negative, or if the required attenuation is greater than the maximum
operational attenuation.
To correct this alarm the user should find sources of excess loss in the NE and correct
them if present. Input power too low to a WTE can also cause this condition, therefore
check the transmit optical output power of the transmitter input to the port raising
PWRSUSP
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on Access Identifier (AID). If the AID is:
For OT or SVAC, continue with the procedure PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power
management suspended) (p. 2-421)
CWR8, go to procedure PWRSUSP - CWR/WR (Power management suspended)
(p. 2-423)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-420 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if there are any other alarms being raised against the OT or SVAC card.
Troubleshoot these alarms first since the PWRSUSP alarm is mainly a tool to help debug
other problems. Common alarms associated with it are LOS and SSF.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total
or Reports > Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Trace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port through the packs
preceding the CWR8 pack or directly to the CWR8 OMD In, or CWR8 CLS (1 to 8) port.
If there is no CWR8 pack for this line trace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC
Line port through the packs preceding the LD pack Line Out port. Check that the fibers
are connected correctly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-421
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - OT or SVAC (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean the fiber ends connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port to the next pack
preceding the CWR8 pack. Packs that may be included in the path to the CWR8 include
the OMD44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the preceding steps did not clear the alarm clean the CWR8 OMD port or CLS (1 to 8)
port that the channel passes through. If there is no CWR8 pack for this line clean the fiber
connections between the packs up to the egress line at the LD pack Line Out port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the fiber connecting the alarmed OT or SVAC Line port to the next pack
preceding the CWR8 pack (or CWR8 CLS (1 to 8) port).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform an egress adjustment to ensure that the line settings have been applied properly
and to optimize the channel powers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the OT or SVAC card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-422 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - CWR/WR (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for communications problems with the upstream NE. Reestablish communications
if required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for upstream problems with the channel. If there are any, troubleshoot and clear
these alarms before continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total
or Reports > Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Use a lightpath trace to discover if the service power level is within limits along the
lightpath.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-423
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - CWR/WR (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the upstream line for any kinks or disconnected fibers and clean the fiber
connections between packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check for alarms indicating a hardware failure for the upstream LD. If there are
problems, try resetting the card first, and then replace it if necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check if the WT powers of the alarmed channels are missing at the CWR8/WRn Sig port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the channels are not missing, proceed to Step 8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-424 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - CWR/WR (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... Then...
the channels are missing, check the add path topology by inspecting for
fiber kinks or disconnected input to the OMD
or CLS port. If no kinks are found, clean
connections between add path packs. Finally,
determine using a power meter that power is
present at the OMD or CLS add port as
expected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for any other alarms being raised at the local node and upstream of it. PWRSUSP
is commonly associated with upstream LOS alarms. These LOS alarms may be
responsible for raising the PWRSUSP alarm. Troubleshoot and clear these alarms before
continuing with this procedure.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total
or Reports > Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check if the local node able to communicate with the upstream node by verifying that the
Control Network is administratively Up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If an SFD40 or SFD40B pack on a FOADM terminal is used, then make sure that it has
completed its warm-up cycle by checking the alarm status of the SFD40/SFD40B.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-425
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRSUSP - CWR/WR (Power management suspended)
PWRSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If cleaning the connections between packs on the add path did not resolve the issue, try
triggering an egress adjustment at the LD Line port of the egress line to which the
CWR8/WRn Sig port connects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Check whether the WT powers of the alarmed channels are missing at the LD Line port of
the egress line that the CWR8 Sig port connects to.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If... Then...
the WT powers of the alarmed channels are Proceed to Step 11.
missing
the WT powers of the alarmed channels are determine if the fiber is kinked along this path
not missing and fix the problem. If loss is excessive and
the fiber is not kinked try to clean connections
between the CWR8/WRn Sig port and the LD
Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Determine using the PhM lightpath trace or other method whether excessive loss exists
between the CWR8/WRn Sig port and the egress line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-427
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRTILTSUSP
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
Note: The PWRTILTSUSP condition notifies the user that alarms present in the
system have caused the automatic adjustments to be suspended.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the PWRTILTSUSP condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the tilt adjustment type at the local node. If the local node uses manual tilt
adjustment, then the upstream node must also be set to manual tilt adjustment. If the local
node uses auto tilt adjustment, then the upstream LD may use either manual or auto tilt
adjustment without fault.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-428 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an adjustment at the LD where the alarm is raised. Then wait 2 seconds for
channel power to update and then recheck the power per channel readings at the external
Line Out port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for any alarms raised against the ingress LD. Troubleshoot those before
proceeding. Pay particular attention to any upstream alarms or conditions, as these may
mask the source of the PWRTILTSUSP problem.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total orReports > Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check if the WTOCM card is admin up and functioning correctly. If there are any other
alarms raised at the WTOCM, troubleshoot those first before proceeding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the LD is functioning correctly, is receiving power and is admin up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-429
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the LD Sig Out port (for a bidirectional LD) or the Line Out port (for a
unidirectional LD) is receiving wavekey powers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify that the WTOCM card is able to see wavekey and power information for all the
channels. Use the Wave Key Presence State in WEBUI Reports > Wavelength Tracker
to help troubleshoot any channels which are not reliable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check if the CWR8-88 or WR8-88A card is admin up and functioning properly. If not,
then perform a warm reset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check if there are any other cards in the NE that are not admin up or functioning properly
and perform a warm reset of the card as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If there is still no power at the Line Out port, then perform a cold reset of the WTOCM
pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-430 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRTILTSUSP (Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended)
PWRTILTSUSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot > Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If there is still no power at the Line Out port, try replacing the card. Refer to Replacing a
Card (General) (p. 3-52).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-431
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures PWRTILTPARAMS (Parameters for Amplifier Tilt Adjustment
PWRTILTPARAMS Unconfigured)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWRTILTPARAMS
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, A2325A, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the PWRTILTPARAMS
condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Configure the parameters required for automatic tilt adjustment to non-default values, or
disable automatic tilt adjustment for the line.
WEBUI Select the amplifier's port LINE or LINEOUT port and click the
Dynamic Tilt Adjustment tab.
Enter the desired values and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-432 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RAMANGAINFAIL (RA2P Gain Failure Detected)
RAMANGAINFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAMANGAINFAIL
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
MajorApplicability RA2P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-433
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RAMANSUP (Raman Suppress - Line)
RAMANSUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAMANSUP
Severity MJ
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see LD Input LOS (p. 2-201)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-434 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)
RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RCVROPTPROG
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for a RCVROPTPROG against the Line port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. When it is Up, then toggle
the administrative state from UP > DOWN > UP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-435
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)
RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the fiber from the port where the LOS or LOF was raised and measure the
optical power. If the optical power is below the threshold level provisioned by the
Photonic Manager for the type of port, then using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the power again. If the optical power is within the
required limits, clean the receive connector on the card. If the RCVROPTPROG
condition is still present more than 15 minutes after the LOS or LOF alarm clears, the
problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the problem is on the Line input signal of the pack, check the signal. After a 40G OT
card has initialized successfully, the Tunable Dispersion Compensator (TDC) and Delay
Line Interferometer (DLI) on the line-side receive path will automatically tune to
optimize transmission performance. During the TDC/DLI optimization, the
RCVROPTPROG alarm is raised to notify the user that the pack is tuning, and
transmission is not yet stable. When the TDC/DLI tuning process is completed, the alarm
clears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-436 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RCVROPTPROG (Receiver Optimization in Progress)
RCVROPTPROG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-437
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RDI (Remote Defect Indication)
RDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RDI
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E
The alarm is cleared when the MEP receives a CCM frame where RDI is set to 0.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the remote peer MEP alarms. The remote peer MEP alarms trigger RDI on the
local MEP.
CLI alarm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-438 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REMOVEMOD (Pluggable Module Removed)
REMOVEMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REMOVEMOD
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-439
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISS
Severity TC
Service affecting? No
Applicability All cards
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If... Then...
the affected unit is a PF in a PSS-16 system, continue with Step 2.
the affected unit is not a FAN unit, nor a PF in proceed to Step 3.
a PSS-16 system,
the affected unit is the FAN, proceed to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Although only one PF is required in the 1830 PSS-16, the REPLUNITMISS condition
may occur when only one PF is present. Disable the REPLUNITMISS alarm on the PF
slot that is empty:
CLI config alm attr slot
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select System and click the Fault function.
On the Alarmable Conditions window, in the Override Severity column,
select Not Reported for the empty PF slot.
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-440 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that there is a card in the slot against which the alarm is raised. If no card is
present, insert a card of the provisioned type into the slot. To verify which card type has
been provisioned for the slot:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
a card is present, remove the card and check for damage to the
shelf's backplane pins and to the card's
backplane connector.
damage is found on the shelf's backplane, arrange for repair to the backplane. Do not
attempt to reinsert the card.
damage is found on the card, but not on the send the card for repair. Replace the damaged
backplane, card with another one of the same type, into
the same slot.
no damage is found on either the backplane or replace the card with another one of the same
the card, type into the same slot. If the Card Missing
alarm clears, send the original card for repair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the shelf has a single Equipment Controller replace the Equipment Controller.
the shelf has redundant Equipment Controllers 1. switch activity
2. replace the Equipment Controller that used
to be active (but is now inactive)
3. switch activity back again
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the REPLUNITMISS alarm does not clear against a FAN, remove the FAN filter and
clear the dust thoroughly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-441
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the REPLUNITMISS alarm does not clear, remove the alarmed card and arrange for
repair to the backplane. Follow the return and repair process to return the damaged card
or shelf to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-442 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISSMOD (Pluggable Module Missing)
REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISSMOD
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If there is no pluggable module in the port where the pluggable module missing condition
is raised, then insert one that is appropriate for that transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-443
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures REPLUNTMISSMOD (Pluggable Module Missing)
REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP plugs into
for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module failure is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-444 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RFIEGR (Remote Client Remote Fault)
RFIEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIEGR
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STX4
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing RFIEGR declared on an OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure LANRFI (p. 2-165) on the far end port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-445
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RFIL (Remote Fault Indication)
RFIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFIL
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve alarms and conditions for the local NE that has the RFI-L condition on its
receive port. Examine them and identify faults on the services supporting the devices that
have the RFI-L condition. Resolve any issues with respect to these faults first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for the far end device. Examine the devices associated with the same
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the RFIL condition is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-446 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures RFIL (Remote Fault Indication)
RFIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the upstream card that is sending the RFIL.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the local card where the RFIL condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card on the upstream card that is sending the RFIL.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reseat the local card where the RFIL condition is raised. Refer to Reseating a Card
(p. 3-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Reseat the upstream card that is sending the RFIL. Refer to Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the alarmed card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow
the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the
faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-447
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDBER (Signal Degrade)
SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDBER
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SDBER against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-448 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDBER (RS) (RS Signal Degrade)
SDBER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SDBER against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-449
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEG-O
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
This procedure details the corrective action for a SDEG-O against the OSC port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the OSC receive power on the port where the SDEG-O condition is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-450 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
no active traffic is present on the system remove the fiber from the receive port where
the SDEG-O is raised and measure the optical
power.
the optical power is below the required using the standard optical fiber jumper
threshold for the type of pluggable module cleaning procedure, clean the fiber, and
installed measure the power again.
the optical power is within the required limits clean the receive connector on the card. If the
SDEG-O condition is still present, the problem
may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the OSC SFP located inside the amplifier. See Replacing an SFP Module
(p. 3-57). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty pluggable module to an authorized repair center for replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-451
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDEG-O (SUPVY Signal Degrade)
SDEG-O
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-452 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SDEGR (Egress Signal Degrade - ODU)
SDEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDEGR
Severity MJ
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SDBER against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the power level is within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-453
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SFMISMATCH (Software Version Mismatch)
SFMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFMISMATCH
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Find the software version number and release number on the EC card. Compare the
corresponding number in the alarmed card. If it is not the same, download the software
from EC to the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-454 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SLTMSIG (Timing reference frequency has moved off the
required accuracy limits (not Protected or Protection not
Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SLTMSIG
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-455
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSF declared on an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-456 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of 11STAR1 OT, and the power level is
within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-457
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODU declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-458 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODU condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of 11STAR1 OT, and the power level is
within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-459
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU)
SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODUEGR
Severity NR
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODUEGR declared on an
OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-460 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SSFODUEGR (Egress Signal Server Failure - ODU)
SSFODUEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODUEGR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of OT, and the power level is within the
operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-461
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
SWEQPT compromised); SWEQPT (Protection switching equipment
failure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-462 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SHELF-1
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI show logs severity (unless the default settings have been changed, the
severity of SWEQPT is minor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-463
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Look for the log "Equipment Controller redundancy is compromised". The log contains a
demerit descriptor, as seen in Table 2-1, Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller
Demerits (p. 2-464).
For each log/demerit that is raised, take the corrective action as listed in the following
table. If a transitional demerit remains for greater than 20 minutes, then proceed with this
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-464 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1 Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller Demerits (continued)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset of the card on the inactive card where the alarm is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-465
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Equipment Controller redundancy is
SWEQPT compromised)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-466 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure)
SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12E,
11DPM12, 11STAR, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any hardware or software failure alarms for the transponder card
that is inactive and providing protection for the working one. Based on the information
presented, determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first using the
appropriate corrective action(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-467
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWEQPT (Protection Switching Equipment Failure)
SWEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the mate transponder card. Refer to Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the mate transponder card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51).
Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-468 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress)
SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability Software Upgrades on all Cards
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on whether you want to commit the software upgrade, or
back out of the software upgrade. The alarm clears when a commit or a back out is issued
after the software upgrade is complete.
For more details on the upgrade process, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning
Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-469
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Committing the Software Upgrade
SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Re-enter this command until the system indicates that the software upgrade is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-470 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Backing out the Software Upgrade
SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-471
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWMTXMOD
SWMTXMOD
This section includes procedures for the following alarms:
SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-472 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability CWR8
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset on the card where the SWMTXMOD condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-473
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Switching Matrix Module Failure)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-474 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWMTXMOD (Y-Cable Switchover Timer Expired)
SWMTXMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Critical
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 11DPE12, 11DPM12, 11QPA4,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCX4, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in the procedure EQPTDGR (p. 2-100) for the standby card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure EQPTDGR (p. 2-100) for the active card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-475
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGCOMMIT (No committed software load (Autoinstall
SWUPGCOMMIT disabled))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGCOMMIT
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To upgrade to a new release or clear the alarm, the current software load must be
committed. Enter the following command to commit the software:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-476 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWUPGFAIL
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability NE level: SYSTEM
Card level: 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, ALPHG,
AHPHG, CWR, OPS, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-477
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Based on the information provided by the status, as listed in the following table,
determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first.
Upgrade
Action
status
Transfer failed This is an internal error indicating a failure between the EC and another
card. Retry the upgrade process.
File access Problem accessing the load file on the EC disk. Retry the upgrade process.
failed
File corruption Retry the upgrade process.
detected during
transfer
Timeout The upgrade timed out. Retry the upgrade process.
Operation in No action required.
progress
Install in No action required.
progress
Transfer in Attempted to do an upgrade while SWL was busy.
progress 1. Wait for the action to complete, or abort the current action (config
software abort).
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Card not found A card was removed while an upgrade was in progress. Retry again (with or
without the missing card).
Card type not The software release does not contain a software load for the card.
found in catalog 1. Check that you are upgrading to the correct software load. Retry with
the correct load.
2. If you are upgrading to the correct load, determine if the card in question
is required for normal operations.
3. If the card is not required, remove the card from the system.
4. If the card is required for normal operation, contact your service
representative.
Lost The card experienced a temporary communications problem. Retry the
communication upgrade process.
with target
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-478 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Upgrade
Action
status
Flash read failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails,then replace the card in question
Flash write The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
failed 1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
Flash erase The card has a problem with one or more of its flash banks.
failed 1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question.
DB erase failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB read failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB write failed Database access failure.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the EC card in question.
TFTP server ip Set the IP address of the TFTP server.
address not set
Failed to access Retry the upgrade process.
catalog
TFTP server Ensure that the server is up and running correctly.
error
TFTP network There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
error 1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
3. Retry the upgrade process.
TFTP timeout There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
3. Retry the upgrade process.
No upgrade path Attempt to upgrade to a release which is not backwards compatible with the
current release.
1. Upgrade to an intermediate release first.
2. Once the intermediate load is accomplished, retry the upgrade process to
the final upgrade release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-479
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Upgrade
Action
status
Operation The upgrade was manually aborted. Retry the upgrade process.
aborted
Invalid script The audit was unable to produce a valid upgrade script. Retry the upgrade
process.
Load and bank An attempt was made to load a boot load in an application bank, or vice
are incompatible versa. This is an invalid operation. Application loads can only be loaded into
application banks; boot loads can only be loaded into boot banks. Perform
the upgrade but this time specify the correct bank.
Backup&Restore Set the backup and restore host IP address.
host IP not set
Database backup Retry the upgrade process.
failed
Database restore Retry the upgrade process.
failed
Couldn't find There is a problem with the database backup server, or the connectivity to
database to the server or the database server configuration.
restore 1. Check and correct the database backup server configuration.
2. Check and correct DCN network connectivity. Confirm that the TFTP
server can accept ping commands (config tools ping <TFTP server>).
3. Check and correct the status of database server.
4. Retry the upgrade process once the previous steps are complete.
Attempted Retry the upgrade process.
activate before
load
Bank is empty Retry the upgrade process.
Load not found An attempt was made to activate a bank with an incorrect or missing
on card software load.
1. Reload the software.
2. Activate the load.
Load file not A software load file could not be found on the disk. Repeat the upgrade to
found transfer the file from FTP to the disk.
Load could not The correct load could not be activated.
be activated Retry the upgrade process.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-480 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Upgrade
Action
status
Operation Card was reset while upgrade was underway.
interrupted by 1. Wait for the reset of card to complete.
reset
2. Relog into NE (if required).
3. Retry the upgrade process.
Software version A commit failed because not all cards were running the same software
mismatch release. This error is not the cause of an upgrade failure alarm.
Repeat the upgrade process.
Activity switch The CCs failed to switch activity, so the upgrade cannot continue.
failed 1. Resolve redundancy issues.
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Mate EC unable The inactive EC was unable to take activity, so the upgrade cannot continue.
to take activity 1. Resolve redundancy issues.
2. Retry the upgrade process.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure
again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade
procedure again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Reseat the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Refer to
Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-481
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Refer to
Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return and repair process in the
Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-482 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or
SYNCOOS Protection not Available)) / SYNCOOS (Timing reference
failed--system going into holdover)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCOOS
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes (LINEREFSYS)
No (SYNC)
Applicability LINEREFSYS, SYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-483
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed (Not Protected or
SYNCOOS Protection not Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-484 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNCOOS (Timing reference failed--system going into
SYNCOOS holdover)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-485
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNREFFAIL (Timing reference failed, (not Protected or
SYNREFFAIL Protection not Available))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNREFFAIL
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-486 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYNREFUNEQ (Timing reference unassigned)
SYNREFUNEQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNREFUNEQ
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-487
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures SYSBOOT (Cold Start); SYSBOOT (Warm Start)
SYSBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSBOOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-488 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-489
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Client Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the section trace configuration of the client port is correct:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-490 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIM (Client Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the SONET device generating the section trace, connected to the client port that is
raising the TIMS alarm, and verify its configuration. If there are errors in the provisioning
of the section trace transmit state, mode or message, correct them. Refer to that device's
user manual.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the physical fibering between the client port and the SONET device is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a cold reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-491
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11QPA4, 43STX4, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the physical fibering between the network receive port of the transponder and
the output port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the procedure Determining the Far End of a Service (p. 3-25) to determine the
NE and location of the transponder at the other end of this service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the physical fibering between the network transmit port of the transponder and
the input port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset of the card on the local card where the TIM condition is raised. If
the problem does not clear then perform a warm reset on the far-end card associated with
the local card raising the TIM condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-492 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the local card where the TIM condition is raised. If the
problem does not clear then perform a cold reset on the far-end card associated with the
local card raising the TIM condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Reseat the alarmed card. If the problem does not clear then reseat the associated far end
card. Refer to Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the alarmed card. If the problem does not clear then replace the associated
far-end card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-493
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMEGR (Egress Trail Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMEGR
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 43STX4, 43STX4P
To clear the TIMEGR condition, perform the steps in the procedure, TIM (p. 2-489).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-494 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Failure to follow instructions in this step could result in SERVICE INTERRUPTION.
Notify the person in charge of the optical line so that traffic can be re-routed.
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the TIMODU alarm declared on
an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the NE alarm list. Determine the AID of the OT reporting this alarm condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-495
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local office records. Determine if the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal matches the data in the expected incoming ODU trail trace message listed
for the report.
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Continue with Step 3.
for this signal matches the data in the expected
incoming ODU trail trace message listed for
the report
the correct expected ODU trail trace message Proceed to Step 6.
for this signal does not match the data in the
expected incoming ODU trail trace message
listed for the report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Trace the fiber jumper connected to the line port of the OT identified in the AID, back to
the source OT. If the jumper fiber is connected to the correct source, go to Step 6.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use local procedures to connect the fiber jumper to the correct source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the alarm is still listed in the NE alarm list, then at the user interface, enter the correct
expected incoming ODU trail trace message. The TIMODU alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-496 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRANSFERLOGFL (Log File Transfer Failure Local)
TRANSFERLOG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRANSFERLOG
No corrective action is required. This alarm is cleared automatically when the log file
transfers successfully.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-497
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRANSFERLOGFT (Log File Transfer Failure Transport)
TRANSFERLOG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity MN
Service affecting? No
MajorApplicability SYSTEM
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Severity MN
Service affecting? No
MajorApplicability SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-498 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRANSFERLOGIP (Log File Transfer In Progress)
TRANSFERLOG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No corrective action is required. The alarm clears automatically when the log file transfer
has completed successfully or failed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-499
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMT (Port Transmit Failure)
TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMT
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
Applicability 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12E,
11STAR, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L,
43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, MVAC, SVAC
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-500 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMT (Port Transmit Failure)
TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module failure is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-501
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)
TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMTMOD
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1,
43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,
4DPA4, A23251, AHPHG, AHPLG ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-502 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TRMTMOD (Pluggable Module Transmit Failure)
TRMTMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type, being
careful with the connected fiber jumpers. Refer to Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module failure is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-503
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures TSMISMATCH (Time Slot Assignment Mismatch)
TSMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TSMISMATCH
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPM12
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for an TSMISMATCH condition against the
OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the Client port on the Far End and Near End both have the same time slots.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-504 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UNG/UNP
UNG/UNP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNG/UNP
UNG/UNP
The OT port has detected a UNG or UNP at the MEP layer.
A MEP detects Unexpected MEP or unexpected period when it receives one of the
following:
CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) and a correct MEG ID, but an Unexpected MEP ID which
includes the MEP's own MEP ID
CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is equal to the MEP's
own MEG level), a correct MEG ID, a correct MEP ID, but with period field value
different than the MEP's own CCM transmission period
Determining the unexpected MEP ID is possible when the MEP maintains a list of its peer
MEP IDs. A list of peer MEP IDs must be configured on each MEP during provisioning.
This condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12E
The alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames an expected MEP ID,
or MEP does not receive a CCM frame with an incorrect period field value.
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the peer MAID (MD name and MA Name). The local MAID and remote peer
MAID should be same.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-505
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWN
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability All cards
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify if the inserted card is supported for the current running release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the card is not yet supported in this release and the card is a required type for the NE,
verify that the correct release is running on the NE. Upgrade the NE to the correct release
if it is not to support this card type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the NE is running the correct release but the card is not yet supported in that release,
remove the card and replace it with one that is supported by the software running on the
NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-506 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)
UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the card is supported and the NE is running the correct release, the problem may be
with the card itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-507
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWNMOD
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-508 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UNKNOWNMOD (Pluggable Module Unknown)
UNKNOWNMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the pluggable module from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the
connector on the pluggable module and the receptacle connector on the card where the
pluggable module plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the pluggable
module into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the pluggable module with another unit of the same type. Refer to
Replacing an SFP Module (p. 3-57). Take special care when handling the connected
fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset of the card on the card where the pluggable module defect is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 . If there is no transmission, check that the provisioned signal rate is supported by the
pluggable module that is present. If not, use a different pluggable module, or change the
signal rate provisioning to a value supported by the pluggable module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-509
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)
UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 4DPA4
Corrective Action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the GFP User Payload Mismatch
on an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with
the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the OT with the UPM defect. Verify the encapsulation mode value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the OT at the opposite end of the link. Ensure that the provisioning for the
encapsulation mode parameter is the same for each OT.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-510 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
URU
Corrective Action
Perform corrective action as described in LOS (Loss of Signal) (p. 2-197).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-511
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OMS-RX (Underlying Resource Unavailable - OMS-RX)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in CWR Input LOS (p. 2-203) (LOSCWRSIG) at the CWR/WR Sig
In port. URU-OMS-RX will clear as LOSCWRSIG clears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-512 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OMS-TX (Underlying Resource Unavailable - OMS-RX)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the steps in CWR Input LOS (p. 2-203) at the WR Sig In port. URU-OMS-RX
will clear as LOSCWRSIG clears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B, AM2017B, OSCT, RA2P
Corrective Action
Perform corrective action as described in LOS (Loss of Signal) (p. 2-197) at the
LINE/LINEIN port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-513
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OTS-RX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS
URU [Receive])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2325B, AM2017B, OSCT, RA2P
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the list of current alarms and conditions on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform corrective action as described in LOS (p. 2-197) at the alarmed port other than
the network facing LINE/LINEIN port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-514 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OTS-TX (Underlying resource unavailable - OTS
URU [Transmit])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2125A,
AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2325B, AM2017B, OSCT, RA2P
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the list of current alarms and conditions on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform corrective action as described in LOS (p. 2-197) at the alarmed port other than
the network facing LINE/LINEIN port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-515
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-OTU (Underlying resource unavailable - OTU)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SCX10, 112SNA1,
112SNX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12, 11QPA4, 11STAR1,
11STGE12, 11STMM10, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the list of current alarms and conditions on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform corrective actions for the reported pluggable module conditions on the OT card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-516 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures URU-S (Underlying Resource Unavailable - Card Failure)
URU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SX10L,
11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4,
A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2325B, CWR, FAN, OPS, OSC,
OSCT, PF, RA2P, SFC, SFD, SVAC, USRPNL, WTOCM
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve the list of current alarms and conditions on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform corrective actions for the reported card failure conditions on the OT card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-517
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault)
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that
has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look
for LOS, LOC or LOF at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the associated
client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-518 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault)
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the desired behavior at the near end client port is to inject an Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to shut the laser off in reaction to the
upstream fault, issue the following command at the near end to change the LOSProp
(LOS Propagation) setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the procedure Determining the Far End of a Service (p. 3-25), determine the
nature of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type alarms at the
associated client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.
If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-519
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault)
USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Repeat Step 6 to Step 9 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-520 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USLOS
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT, AM2017B,
AM2325B, OSCT
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step. It
may take several seconds for channel power out of range and channel absent alarms to
clear after each step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-521
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USLOS (Upstream Channel Absent)
USLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Find the source of the channel's service and ensure that the add cross connect is
administratively up and that there are no Wavelength Tracker or channel
alarms/conditions for the associated transponder or SVAC upstream. If there are, clear
those alarms/conditions first before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Retrieve the configured topology upstream from this port to the service's ingress point to
the NE. Ensure that the physical fiber topology matches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the loss in the fiber that is feeding the port is not higher than expected by
comparing the bulk powers ending and leaving the fiber. If the loss is higher than
expected, clean the fiber ends, and if this does not solve the problem, replace the fiber. If
this still does not solve the condition on the amplifier, the problem may be with the card
itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-522 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input
Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USOCHCOLLISION
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Path Power Trace (p. 3-31) to identify the network path the
particular alarmed channel is traversing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
show condition
WEBUI Reports > Alarm List > Total
Reports > Condition List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-523
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures USOCHCOLLISION (Upstream Channel Collision Input
USOCHCOLLISION Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the card. Refer to Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return
and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to
an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-524 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGLOA (Loss of alignment)
VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCGLOA
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11STMM10
Corrective Action
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the end-to-end path of the 11STMM10 circuit to ensure that the card reporting the
alarm is connected to a 11STMM10 on the far end. A possible cause of this alarm is if the
card is connected to another valid OC-48 signal generated by a test set or SONET
interface, but which does not include two GFP encapsulated 1GbE signals. Perform a
warm card reset of the 11STMM10 reporting the alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-525
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGLOA (Loss of alignment)
VCGLOA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the
11STMM10 reporting the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset of the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the
11STMM10 reporting the alarm.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the card of the far end 11STMM10 that is connected to the 11STMM10 reporting
the alarm. Refer to Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the 11STMM10 reporting the alarm. Refer to Replacing System Components
(p. 3-51). Follow the return and repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide
to return the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-526 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VCGSSF (VCG Server Signal Failure)
VCGSSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCGSSF
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11STMM10
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the time slot information on the 11STMM10 line port and ODU1 are correctly
provisioned on each end of the optical link. If not, use the following CLI commands to
ensure timeslots are provisioned the same:
Config interface 11STMM10 shelf slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot
line 1 - 4
Config interface 11stmm10 shelf slot/C{1-10} 1gbe timeslot vts
0 or 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-527
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect]
VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGEHIGH
Severity Critical
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SX10L, 11DPE12E,
11DPM12, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43SCX4, 43STA1P,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG,
ALPFGT, AM2017B, AM2125A, AM2125B, CWR, Equipment
Controller, FLC, MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P,
SVAC, USRPNL, WR, WTOCM
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-528 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGEHIGH [High input voltage defect]
VOLTAGEHIGH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-529
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect]
VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGELOW
Severity Critical
Service affecting? No
Applicability 112SA1L, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10,
112SX10L, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 11STMM10,
11STGE12, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4L, 43STA1P, 43STX4,
43STX4P, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, ALPFGT,
AM2017B, AM2325A, CWR, Equipment Controller, FLC,
MESH4, MT0C, MVAC, OPS, OSCT, RA2P, SVAC, USRPNL,
WR, WTOCM
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it does not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-530 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VOLTAGELOW [Low input voltage defect]
VOLTAGELOW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the Equipment Controller that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return
and repair process to return the card to an authorized repair center for replacement
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-531
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VTSFDI (VTS Forward Defect Indication)
VTSFDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSFDI
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability 11DPE12, 11DPE12E
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTSFDI alarm associated
with an 11DPE12/11DPE12E OT port. At the end of each step, wait to see if the fault
clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTU2 port or client
GBE port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-532 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures VTSOCI (VTS Open Connection Indication)
VTSOCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTSOCI
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability 11DPE12/11DPE12E
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the VTOCI alarm associated with
an 11DPE12/11DPE12E port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-533
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWBK
Corrective Action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.If
there are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-534 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWBK (Automatic switch to working)
WKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the state is down, the switch may have been caused by user administrative provisioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check for faults on the protection side card, or the protection side client/line ports.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, the switch may have occurred due to a
transient defect that has since cleared. The
action required to clear this condition depends
on whether or not there are outstanding
problems against the working
facility/equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-536 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
Corrective Action
The action required to clear this condition depends on whether or not there are
outstanding problems against the working facility/equipment.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.If
there are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-537
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-538 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
WTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTR
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability LINEREFSYS
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 2-539
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Trouble-clearing procedures WTR (Wait to restore timer in effect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-540 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
3 Supporting procedures
3
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists the following supporting procedures for the 1830 Photonic Service
Switch 32/16/4 that are referenced in Chapter 2, Trouble-clearing procedures.
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-1
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-3
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Viewing Alarms and Logs
Alarms and Logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures WebUI Procedure
Alarms and Logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI Procedure
The web interface displays a summary of the active alarms on the NE at the top of the
navigation pane. The active alarm display is refreshed as specified in the session settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the web interface, select a shelf, slot, or port on the Device Tree on the left of the
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To view a detailed list of active alarms, click on the active alarm summary display or
select Reports > Alarm List > Total.
Result: The Alarm List is displayed with a detailed list of the active alarms on the NE.
The list of alarms is refreshed automatically. You can refresh the list at any time by
clicking Refresh.
If you want to see alarms of one specific severity type, you can also sort this list by
severity (Critical, Major, or Minor) by selecting the corresponding severity after
Reports > Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To view a detailed list of active conditions, select Reports > Condition List. Scroll to the
right to view the condition types associated with each alarm.
Result: The Condition List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To view logs, select Logs > Alarms > Severity Level Alarm Log.
Result: The Alarms Log is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-5
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures 4DPA4 Signal Rates
Card-Specific Troubleshooting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card-Specific Troubleshooting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and
Card-Specific Troubleshooting PF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The total power at the monitored LD port where the channel powers are missing will
show a power level that is normal (see Figure 3-2, Total Power at Monitored LD Power
Level (p. 3-7)):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-7
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and
Card-Specific Troubleshooting PF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WTOCM IN port will show no information for the total power at the WTOCM port
and the LD port (see Figure 3-3, WTOCM and LD Total Power (p. 3-8)). Note that
readings normally available from the WTOCM are not reported.
If only one clock source is present in the system and it fails, the FPGA may not recover
properly. The FPGA requires the clocks to be Stratum 3 quality or higher. It is
recommended that you use two PF units for clock and power redundancy.
Note: No alarm conditions are associated with this issue. If you see this issue with
the Card Failure or Card Degrade alarm, then the issue is likely caused by another
problem. Replacing the card should resolve these alarms (see Replacing a Card
(General) (p. 3-52)).
Procedure
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and
Card-Specific Troubleshooting PF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Replace the WTOCM pack (see Replacing a Card (General) (p. 3-52)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-9
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To check that the NE is running software of Release 1.1.0 or higher, select System in the
Equipment Tree.
Result: The System Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Changing an NE from a Nonredundant to a Redundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install the redundant Equipment Controller into the shelf in slot 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To check that the NE is running software of Release 1.1.0 or higher, type sh version.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install the redundant Equipment Controller into the shelf in slot 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-11
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller to be removed is continue with Step 3.
active (the Active LED is green)
the Equipment Controller to be removed is not proceed to Step 8.
active (the Active LED is not lit)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Switch activity from one Equipment Controller to the other. In the Equipment Tree, select
the slot containing the Equipment Controller.
Result: The Card Properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The EC Protection Software Settings window is displayed. Note the Protection Setting
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove any cables that are attached to the Equipment Controller to be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select the slot for the Equipment Controller in the Equipment Tree that you removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Insert an Equipment Controller blank into the empty Equipment Controller slot.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
2 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller to be removed is continue with Step 3.
active (the Active LED is green)
the Equipment Controller to be removed is not proceed to Step 4.
active (the Active LED is not lit)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-13
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Changing an NE From a Redundant to a Nonredundant
Changing the Equipment Controller Configuration in an NE Equipment Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove any cables that are attached to the Equipment Controller to be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert an Equipment Controller blank into the empty Equipment Controller slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set to the Equipment Controller to be removed to the administrative state of Down, and
then set the slot to empty by typing the following commands:
1. config slot shelf_slot state down
2. config slot shelf_slot type empty
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Corrective Action
Checking for Services on a Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective Action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is currently carrying active
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It may be possible to switch all services onto an alternate path if all services are protected.
Examine the output from Step 1. If a service is protected it will have a protection member
listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
This will reveal the nodes that are the endpoints of the service as well as the APS
protection groups.
Repeat items 2 through 5 for each protected service:
2. Log into the one end of the service.
3. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
4. Log into the other end of the service.
5. Issue a force switch away from the path about to be broken.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-15
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Corrective Action
Checking for Services on a Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. If any services are marked as Active then this equipment is still carrying active
services.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Configuring the Alarm Severity Using the WebUI
Configuring alarm severity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Administration > Alarm Configuration and select the entity type for which you
want to change the alarm configuration.
The alarm conditions applicable to the selected entity type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on the row containing the alarm condition you want to change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the new severity from the drop-down list and click Submit.
The new alarm severity is applied for the selected condition on all of the entities on the
NE that match the selected entity type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
2 Click Fault.
Result: The Alarmable Conditions are displayed for this entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on the row containing the alarm condition you want to change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the new severity from the drop-down list, and click Submit.
Result: The new alarm severity is applied for the selected condition on the selected
entity.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-17
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM
Configuring alarm severity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To configure the alarm severity for all entities of the same type, go to the Topology View
and select the NE or NEs on which you want to change the alarm severity.
Note: If you do not explicitly select any NEs, the EMS will select all NEs in the
network for configuration. In this case, the EMS will retrieve alarm configuration data
for all of the NEs in the network, which may take a significant amount of time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the entity type for which you want to change the alarm severity.
A list of condition types applicable to the selected entity is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Configuring Alarm Severity Using the 1354 RM-PhM
Configuring alarm severity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Alarm Severity for a Specific Entity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To configure the alarm severity for a specific entity, from the Management Control panel
(Topology View) and select the NE on which you want to change the alarm severity for a
specific entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the specific entity (card or port) where you want to change the alarm severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-19
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Backing Up a Database
Database Backup and Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing Up a Database
Backing Up a Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-1, Database
Backup and Restore Parameters (p. 3-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Restoring a Database
Database Backup and Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring a Database
Restoring the Database Using the WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-1, Database
Backup and Restore Parameters (p. 3-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Apply > Restore, or if you want to use your previous serial number, click Force
Restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-21
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures DCN Diagnostics
DCN Diagnostics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCN Diagnostics
DCN Diagnostics
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS allows the ability to perform trace-route and ping functions
from the WebUI. This allows you to perform quick troubleshooting diagnostics on the
DCN, for example if the NE is not able to communicate with other NEs or with the
management system through the normal channels due to connectivity over the GCC/OSC.
Perform the steps in the following procedure if the NE does not have network
reachability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect to the NE (if you are local) via the CIT port. Open up the web browser to run
WebUI, and issue the ping by entering the fields on this window.
WEBUI Select Administration > Tools > Ping (see Figure 3-4, Ping Window
(p. 3-23)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures DCN Diagnostics
DCN Diagnostics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Test connectivity to other NEs within the WDM network by launching the ping
application from WebUI. Enter the fields on this window, and the ping result is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can also configure the traceroute functionality for the desired NE (see Figure 3-5,
Traceroute Window (p. 3-24)).
WEBUI Select Administration > Tools > Traceroute (see Figure 3-5, Traceroute
Window (p. 3-24)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-23
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures DCN Diagnostics
DCN Diagnostics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OCh Trail name for the near end of the service.
Search for the <shelf/slot/port> corresponding to the card and port in question. This will
provide the information required to proceed to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the output of Step 2 to determine the far end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-25
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Selecting a Specific Firmware Version
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware
Procedure
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Reseating a Card (p. 3-49).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
The following procedure is recommended when you want to avoid a firmware upgrade
and use/retain a specific firmware version.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
CLI show firmware card shelf slot detail
Record the currently active firmware load (from the recently upgraded
release) as active-release
WEBUI Select the card, click the Firmware tab, and view the Active Release field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Selecting a Specific Firmware Version
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Establish a particular release for the instance of the card in your system.
The system will reload this specific version rather than the default recommended version
on any subsequent cold reset of that card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
This action will restart the software on the card (nonservice affecting), clearing the
FWUPGRADEPENDING condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The remaining cards will need to be cold-restarted at a time of your choosing to upgrade
to the recommended firmware.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-27
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures High Temperature Threshold Exceeded
High Temperature Troubleshooting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it doesn't, then go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the fan tray is installed and that no fan tray alarms are present. Correct any
faults found.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that filler cards are installed in all empty slots in the
shelf. This helps ensure proper airflow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for a dirty air filter. Clean or replace it as necessary. Contact your service
representative for replacement filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify
that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too
high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10 C).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures High Temperature Threshold Exceeded
High Temperature Troubleshooting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. See Replacing System Components (p. 3-51). Follow the return and
repair process in the Customer and Product Support guide to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-29
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures LED Status Behavior
LED Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
Path Power Trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
sh condition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the first point along the path at which power out of range or absent is observed, or
there is a significant difference between expected and observed power. This point is
referred to as the "First point of concern" in this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot the alarms, concentrating on the points adjacent to the first point of concern.
The problem is most likely located between the first point of concern and the detection
point immediately upstream from it.
Note: It may take several seconds after corrective actions have been applied for
channel missing, channel absent, and power out of range alarms to clear.
1. Ensure that the relevant connection exists and is administratively up at the first point
of concern and at the point immediately upstream from it.
2. Examine the output for the connection of the appropriate band and channel. If the
connection exists then check the admin states of the connection and associated ports.
3. If the connection or ports are admin down then the entities must be brought admin up
in order to clear the alarm(s).
To bring a connection admin up:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-31
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
Path Power Trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this does not resolve the problem, go to 4.
4. If this connection terminates on a transponder then confirm that the associated client
port is administratively up.
5. If the client port is admin down then it must be brought admin up in order to clear the
alarm(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Overview
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing loopbacks
Overview
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Performing loopbacks is service affecting. You must take the card out of service before
performing a loopback test.
None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-33
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-35
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-9 43STA1P Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-37
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-10 11DPE12 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 11DPE12E Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-39
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-12 11DPM12 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-40 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 4DPA4 (No FEC) Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-41
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-14 4DPA4 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-42 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 11QPA4 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-43
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-16 11STAR1 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-44 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-17 11STMM10 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-45
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Loopback Variation on OTs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 11STGE12 Loopback Position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-46 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
Provisioning an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
Before you begin
Note: Ensure that no optical channel service has been provisioned before the
SFD40/SFD40B has initialized. If optical channel services are present, delete them
(see Step 3).
Note: Before the SFD40/SFD40B is in service, the OTUs connected to the
SFD40/SFD40B should be turned off to avoid channel leakage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the SFD40/SFD40B card to the amplifier cards with the inventory cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Optional: To monitor the SFD40/SFD40B temperature alarms and Input LOS alarm from
the NE management software, connect the SFD40/SD40B card to the User Panel with the
housekeeping cable and IDC block.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Power up the SFD40/SFD40B card, and wait for it to initialize (about 5 to 10 minutes).
Note the SFD40/SFD40B status by monitoring the temperature LED of the
SFD40/SFD40B. The SFD40/SFD40B should in service when the temperature and
initialization LEDs turn green. Also check the alarm status on the NE management
software to ensure that the housekeeping cable has been properly connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Provision the optical channel service using the NE management software, and set up the
link.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-47
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Cold Restart of a Pack with Traffic
Rebooting Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rebooting Components
1 Put the card (and ports) into maintenance state before performing the cold restart. In
maintenance state, the cross connects can remain in place, and transmission is still
carried.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a cold restart of the entire NE, instead of each individual card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-48 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
Reseating a Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reseating a Card
Procedure
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A card reseat is service impacting if the card is currently carrying services. To discover if
any services are currently carried over a card, perform the procedure Checking for
Services on a Port (p. 3-15). If there are services currently carried over the card, it may
be best to wait for a maintenance window before reseating the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot an additional 1 cm
(about 1/4 inch) being careful not to pull on any connected fibers on the NE. You will
encounter some resistance while the card is seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling
force to unseat the card from the backplane. All of the LEDs on the card will be off when
the card is fully unseated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-49
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Procedure
Reseating a Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Slot Equipage Requirement
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-51
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing a Card (General)
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the replacement card is unpacked and prepared for immediate installation
before starting any other work.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that you have an unobstructed extraction path. Tie back any adjacent fibers that
may be impacted by the card extraction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting up and out. This will partially unseat
the card from the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-52 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing a Card (General)
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Grasp the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot, being careful not to pull
on any connected fibers on the NE. You will encounter some resistance while the card is
seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling force to unseat the card from the backplane.
Slide the card out of the slot. When the card is almost removed, place a hand under the
card to avoid dropping it when it is fully removed from the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue
with Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Grasp replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the
card's PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted,
grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-53
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing a Card (General)
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
Note: If the card software version does not match the NE software version, the card
automatically upgrades to the correct software version. In this case, a software
upgrade alarm will be present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-54 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing a 100G A/D CFP
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert OT pack back on shelf. If the opening is tight, pushing the CFP using the screws
may not push the CFP far enough to make contact. You may need to push the CFP from
its faceplate and not the screws.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-55
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing a DCM
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing a DCM
Perform the steps in the following procedure to replace a DCM. NOTE: This procedure is
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Change the serial number of associated DCM shelf to match the serial number of the
replacement DCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the old DCM pack and replace with the new DCM pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 An alarm is raised , indicating that a required power adjustment is required. Perform the
associated power adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-56 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an SFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-57
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an SFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement SFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-59
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an XFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config interface <card type shelf slot port> state down
config interface <card type shelf slot port> unassign
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the client port.
In the Primary State field, select Out of Service and click Submit.
Click the Delete tab.
Select Delete this Port, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the XFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use the hook on the end of the XFP extractor/LC connector tool (or similar tool) to pull
down the bail on the XFP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-60 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an XFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use hook on end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool to pull the XFP straight back until
its bail can be grasped by fingers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Grasp the bail with fingers and completely extract XFP module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-61
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an XFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement XFP module (protocol, wavelength, and
reach) match the specifications of the removed SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the replacement XFP module into the XFP slot. Push on the front of the SFP module
until you hear a "click" sound, indicating the XFP module is securely locked into the XFP
slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI config interface <card type shelf slot port> signal rate
config interface <card type shelf slot port> state up
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the client port.
In the Port Details window, select Signal Rate and Primary State In Service.
Click Submit.
Result: The Card Inventory report for the pluggable modules will now display the
proper information for the new XFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If the 1354RM-Photonic Manager EMS is used to manage the customer network: The
service can be discovered by running the service discovery utility in the
1354RM-Photonic Manager EMS.
Note: Rediscovering the service would replace the service name with a label created
by the 1354RM-Photonic Manager EMS. The service label can be modified after
rediscovering the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-62 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an OSC SFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the LD from the shelf, the OSC SFP is mounted inside the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that all of the OSC fibers connected to the OSC SFP module are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the OSC SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Release the latch on the OSC SFP module. The latch used to secure the module in the
OSC SFP port may use either a lever or push-button locking mechanism:
To release a lever latch, lift the latch 90 degrees so that it is perpendicular to the card
faceplate.
To release a push button latch, depress the push button located on the side of the OSC
SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 With the latch in the release position, grasp the OSC SFP module on both sides and
remove it from the OSC SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure that the specifications for the replacement OSC SFP module (protocol,
wavelength, and reach) match the specifications of the removed OSC SFP module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-63
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an OSC SFP Module
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert the replacement OSC SFP module into the OSC SFP slot. Push on the front of the
OSC SFP module until you hear a click sound, indicating the OSC SFP module is
securely locked into the OSC SFP slot. Be sure that the OS1 and OS2 fibers are correctly
connected to the OS1 or OS2 SFP or XFP ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI alm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-64 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Save the TID (NE Name), User Panel OADM port details, loopback IP address, and static
routing and gateway information to use if a reboot interrupts this procedure.
Verify the TID and loopback IP address on the System Properties window (select
System on the Equipment Tree).
Verify the OAMP on the User Panel on the Port Interface Settings window (select
USRPNL > OAMP on the Equipment Tree).
Verify the IP routes on the IP Routes window (select Administration > Networking >
IP Routes).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Optionally, you can view the current User Panel serial number by selecting Reports >
Inventory > Card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Optionally, you can view the new User Panel serial number by selecting Reports >
Inventory > Card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-65
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the User Panel and make all connections as described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.50 Installation
and System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Backup the database again, now that the User Panel is successfully replaced.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1 Save the TID, User Panel OADM port details, loopback IP address, and static routing and
gateway information, or know where to retrieve this information to use if a reboot
interrupts this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the following CLI commands, pressing Enter after each command:
1. show general name
2. show interface loopback
3. show interface usrpnl oamp
4. show general name
Note the IP address and administrative state.
5. show cn routes static
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check whether any alarms are present by typing alm. Clear any present database alarms.
Then backup the current database to use if a reboot interrupts the procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-66 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the User Panel and make all connections as described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.50 Installation
and System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If... Then...
the NE automatically reboots perform the steps in the procedure,
DBINVALID (p. 2-82), then continue with
Step 6.
To preserve traffic during an NE reboot, the
NE's database should NOT be initialized. After
the reboot, a previously backed up database
should be restored to the NE.
the NE does not automatically reboot continue with Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Backup the database again, now that the User Panel is successfully replaced.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-67
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Re-provision the user panel OAMP port IP address for this NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-provision the static routing and gateway information for this NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-68 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the User Panel
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select Database > Backup and Restore, and on the Database Backup and
Restore window, click Force Restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-69
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To replace a Equipment Controller in a Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the
WebUI
The Equipment Controller is hot-swappable, allowing in-service replacement. This
procedure is not service-affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To switch the Equipment Controller, select Enable Protection Switch, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unplug any Ethernet or serial cables that are connected to the Equipment Controller to be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove and replace the card (see Replacing a Card (General) (p. 3-52)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-70 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An activity switch occurs if the removed card is the active Equipment Controller. When
the new Equipment Controller is inserted in the shelf, it is synchronized with the active
Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To replace a Equipment Controller in a Shelf with Redundant Equipment Controllers Using the CLI
The Equipment Controller is hot-swappable, allowing in-service replacement. This
procedure is not service-affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Unplug any Ethernet or serial cables that are connected to the Equipment Controller to be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the card (see Replacing a Card (General) (p. 3-52)).
An activity switch occurs if the removed card is the active Equipment Controller. When
the new Equipment Controller is inserted in the shelf, it is synchronized with the active
Equipment Controller.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-71
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the database is valid, set up the database server information and back up the database
(see Backing Up a Database (p. 3-20)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-72 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alarm List is displayed. The Equipment Controller will have a
DBINVALID alarm active after the reboot has completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 6
factory,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 24.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the shelf and slot where the User Panel is located (slot 40). Click the plus sign and
select OAMP.
Result: The Port Interface Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Leave the fields on this window at their default values. Select the Advertise field. Click
Create.
Result: The Create Static IP Route window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-73
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The FTP Server Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Enter the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 3-2, FTP Server
Parameters (p. 3-74).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-74 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Status field changes to In Progress. Wait a few minutes for the software to
download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Click Refresh.
Result: The Status field changes to Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Click OK.
Result: The system will log you out of the NE. Wait a few minutes for the software to
activate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 To clear the DBINVALID alarm, restore the database (see Restoring a Database
(p. 3-21)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-75
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Click Alarms. The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, continue with Step 26.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Click Alarms.
Result: The Alarms List is displayed. The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm should not be
present in the Alarm List.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1 Ensure that you are working with a valid database. Set up the database server information.
Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If... Then...
the Equipment Controller is new from the continue with Step 5
factory or does not contain the desired
software release,
the Equipment Controller has the current proceed to Step 13.
desired software,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 To configure or verify static routes, type config cn routes default add gateway
default IP address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-77
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Set up the software server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software server ip IP address
2. config software server userid user ID
Enter your password when prompted.
3. config software server root /path
4. config software server detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Set up the database server information. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. Type database server config.
2. config database server ip IP Address, using the IP address where the
database is stored.
3. config database userid, then enter your user ID and password when prompted.
4. config database path directory with the path on the PC where the database is
saved.
5. config database detail to verify your IP address, user ID, and path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Upgrade the software. Type each command line, and press Enter:
1. config software upgrade manual audit release directory on RFS
no backup enforced. (The release directory would be combined with the
Software server root parameter value to make the path on the Remote File Server
where the software release resides. See also the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch Release 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) 3.6.50 Installation and System
Turn-up Guide.)
2. config software upgrade manual load
3. Type config software upgrade manual activate.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Replace the Equipment Controller in the shelf. Wait a few minutes for the Equipment
Controller to initialize.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-78 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The database server information must be set up to point to the latest database backup for
this NE, which will be pulled down to the NE during a downgrade automatically. (See
Step 1.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Login to the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 If... Then...
the DBINVALID alarm is raised, restore the database (see Restoring a
Database (p. 3-21)).
DBINVALID alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Restore the database. Type config database restore and at the prompt, type yes to
confirm.
The system will reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Type alm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 If... Then...
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised, type config software upgrade commit
and wait a few minutes for the alarm to clear.
the SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is not raised, STOP! You are done with this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-79
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Air Filter
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
NOTICE
To prevent possible contamination of the EUT when the fan filter is
removed, fans must be temporarily shut down before the replacing the
filter.
It is important that the new fan filter be installed and the fans restarted within 120
seconds to prevent overheating of circuit components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Unscrew the filter retainer with slot labeling on the lower front of the shelf and slide it
forward (see Figure 3-24, Unscrew Filter Retainer (p. 3-81)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-80 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Air Filter
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reach beneath the filter retainer and locate the air filter. Slide the air filter out of the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Locate the arrows on the front of the new filter (see Figure 3-25, New Filter (p. 3-81)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-81
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Air Filter
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 With the arrows pointing up, slide the new filter in and up into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Screw the filter retainer back into place (see Figure 3-26, New Filter Installed
(p. 3-82)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-82 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Fan
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the space in front of the fan unit is completely clear of fibers, cables, and so
on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the new fan unit is completely unpacked and ready to install before removing
old fan unit.
Note: The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 circuit packs require constant airflow
for cooling and will overheat quickly with the fan removed. Do not remove the old
fan until you are ready to immediately install the new fan or customer traffic may be
affected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-83
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Fan
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fully loosen the two Phillips head screws at the left and right ends on the front of the fan
unit. (The screws are captured and will not fall out of the fan unit.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Grasp fan unit handles and slide fan unit straight back until it is free of the sub rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Replacing the Fan
Replacing System Components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-85
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Software Download in Network with GNEs and RNEs
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-86 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the software version. If the DBINVALID alarm was raised in R3.0.2 software, then
configure the software server setting.
CLI sh version
alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-87
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Restoring an NE in DBINVALID State
Software Upgrades
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the software version and confirm the NE is running R2.5 load
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure the database server setting and restore the valid R2.5 database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 One the database is restored successfully, perform the software upgrade procedure for
R2.5.n to R3.0.2.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-88 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues
User Panel Switch Settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 3-89
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Supporting procedures Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-90 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See ALPHG (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See access identifier (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See alarm indication message (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See alarm indication signal (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-1
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See AHPHG (p. GL-1) for related term.
ANSI
See American National Standards Institute (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See avalanche photodiode (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See automatic protection switching (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See automatic power shutdown (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See amplified spontaneous emission (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
ATM
See asynchronous transfer mode (p. GL-2) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B back reflection
See Fresnel reflection (p. GL-11).
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
BB
See broadband (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See broadband amplifier (p. GL-4) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-3
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBE
See background block errors (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See backward defect indication (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See bit error rate (p. GL-4) for definition.
BLSR
See bidirectional line switched ring (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See band optical filter (p. GL-3) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CAD
See channel add/drop card (p. GL-5) for definition.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See classless inter-domain routing (p. GL-5) for definition.
CIT
See craft interface terminal (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
CLEI
See common language element identifier (p. GL-5) for definition.
CO
See central office (p. GL-4) for definition.
COF
See channel optical filter (p. GL-5) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-5
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
CPE
See customer premises equipment (p. GL-6) for definition.
CR
See coupling ratio/loss (p. GL-6) for definition.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-5) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM
See dispersion compensation module (p. GL-7) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCN
See data communication network (p. GL-6) for definition.
DGEF
See dynamic gain equalization filter (p. GL-7) for definition.
DHCP
See dynamic host configuration protocol (p. GL-7) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -
Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-7) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E earth
The European term for electrical ground.
EC
See equipment controller (p. GL-9) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-7
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EDFA
See erbium-doped fiber amplifier (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See Electronic Industries Alliance (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMC
See electromagnetic capability (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMI
See electromagnetic interference (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See Element Management System (p. GL-8) for definition.
EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for Europasche Norm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
ESD
See electrostatic discharge (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute (p. GL-9) for definition.
eVOA
See electrical variable optical attentuator (p. GL-8) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-9
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See fiber optic connector (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCC
See Federal Communications Commission (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See frame check sequence (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDA
See Food and Drug Administration (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface (p. GL-10) for definition.
FDI
See forward defect indicator (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See forward error correction (p. GL-11) for definition.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the Internet.
FIT
See failure in time (p. GL-9) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See flash disk memory module (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
FPGA
See field-programmable gate array (p. GL-10) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-11
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See back
reflection (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See file transfer protocol (p. GL-10) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
GbE
See Gigabit Ethernet (p. GL-12) for definition.
GFP
See generic framing protocol (p. GL-12) for definition.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See gateway network element (p. GL-12) for definition.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-12 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See graphical user interface (p. GL-12) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ILA
See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for definition.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
See Internet protocol (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISO
See International Standards Organization (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See Internet service provider (p. GL-13) for definition.
ITU
See International Telecommunications Union (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L lambda ()
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See wavelength (p. GL-32) for related term.
LBC
See laser bias current (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See line build out (p. GL-15) for definition.
LC
See Lucent connector (p. GL-15) for definition.
LD
See line driver (p. GL-15) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
LOF
See loss of frame (p. GL-15) for definition.
LOS
See loss of service/loss of signal (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
LR
See long reach (p. GL-15) for definition.
LSA
See link state advertisement (p. GL-15) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-15
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MA
maintenance association
MAC
See media access control (p. GL-16) for definition.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
MC
See master controller (p. GL-16) for definition.
MD
maintenance domain
MEP
maintenance end point
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See management information base (p. GL-16) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See mid-stage access amplifier (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTBF
See mean time between failures (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See mean time to repair (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See multiplexer (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NE
See network element (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See Network Equipment Building System requirements (p. GL-18) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
NMS
See Network Element Management System (p. GL-17) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelves
that are viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the
following:
up to two single optical shelves
a single electrical shelf
a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
NSA
See non-service affecting (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See network time protocol (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA
See optical amplifier (p. GL-19) for definition.
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
See optical carrier level-n (p. GL-19) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See optical channel (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU
See optical demultiplexer (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See optical-electrical-optical conversion (p. GL-20) for definition.
OOF
See out of frame (p. GL-21) for definition.
OPR
See OPR (p. 2-295) for definition.
OPS
See optical protection switch (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-19
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
within the context of one cell.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-20 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See optical supervisory channel (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (p. GL-18) for definition.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection reference model (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See optical signal to noise ratio (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See outside plant (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See Operations Support System (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See optical transponder (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See optical transport network (p. GL-20) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PCS
See physical coding sublayer (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See polarization dependent loss (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See protocol data unit (p. GL-22) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
PM
See performance monitoring (p. GL-21) for definition.
PMD
See polarization mode dispersion (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
PPS
See photonic protection switch (p. GL-22) for definition.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See photonic cross-connect (p. GL-21) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-22 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QoS
See quality of service (p. GL-23) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also
called bay frames.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OSNR degradation).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for related term.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-23
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See request for comment (p. GL-23) for definition.
RIP
See routing information protocol (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See random jitter (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See remote network monitoring (p. GL-23) for definition.
ROADM
See reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-23) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SA
See service affecting (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See storage area network (p. GL-27) for definition.
SC
See shelf controller (p. GL-25) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See software control of transmission (p. GL-26) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-24 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (p. GL-28) for definition.
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
services
Within the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 system, services can be offered directly to end
customers or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See static filter, CWDM (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFD
See static filter, DWDM (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFP
See small form-factor pluggable module (p. GL-26) for definition.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped
with cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards.
The shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate.
Every node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the
node. The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management
system. Connections between nodes use network links. See node (p. GL-18) for related term.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-25
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See Service Level Agreement (p. GL-25) for definition.
SMF
See single-mode fiber (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See Sub-Network Connection Protocol (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol (p. GL-26) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-26 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET
See Synchronous Optical Network (p. GL-28) for definition.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See shared risk group (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSH
See secure shell (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSMF
See standard single-mode fiber (p. GL-27) for definition.
ST
See straight-tip connector (p. GL-28) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-27
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STP
See signaling transfer point (p. GL-25) for definition.
STS, STS-n
See synchronous transport signal-n (p. GL-28) for definition.
SW generic
See software generic (p. GL-26) for definition.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T tap
The entry point into a system module.
TCA
See threshold crossing alert (p. GL-29) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-28 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol (p. GL-30) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See time-division multiplexing (p. GL-29) for definition.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
TID
See target identifier (p. GL-28) for definition.
TMN
See Telecommunications Management Network (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-29
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-4 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UDP
See user datagram protocol (p. GL-30) for definition.
UL
See Underwriters Laboratories (p. GL-30) for definition.
UPSR
See unidirectional path-switched ring (p. GL-30) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-30 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCAT
See virtual concatenation (p. GL-31) for definition.
VOA
See variable optical attenuator (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See very short reach (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See virtual time-slot (p. GL-31) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-31
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See wave division multiplexing (p. GL-32) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-32 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See Web user interface (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4 GL-33
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-34 1830 PSS-36/PSS32/PSS-16/PSS-4
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012